Download Chevrolet 2004 SSR Pickup Specifications

2004 Chevrolet SSR Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-6
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-21
Air Bag Systems
...................................... 1-42
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-55
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-6
Windows
.................................................. 2-9
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-11
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-13
Mirrors .................................................... 2-23
HomeLink® Transmitter
............................. 2-26
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-30
Convertible Top
....................................... 2-45
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-52
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-23
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-44
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-61
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-32
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-43
Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 5-43
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-43
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-49
Tires
...................................................... 5-51
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-74
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-82
Electrical System ...................................... 5-83
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-92
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-12
Index .................................................................1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem are registered
trademarks and the name SSR is a trademark of
General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever
it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. C2439 A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what
is in the manual, and the page number where you will
find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 11/07/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the
warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you
or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage your
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the
damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
There are also warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be
found on the vehicle:
iv
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Power Seats ..................................................1-2
Heated Seats .................................................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-6
Safety Belts .....................................................1-6
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-6
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-11
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-12
Driver Position ..............................................1-12
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-19
Passenger Position .......................................1-20
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-20
Child Restraints .............................................1-21
Older Children ..............................................1-21
Infants and Young Children ............................1-24
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-27
Top Strap ....................................................1-31
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-32
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System) ......................1-32
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System ...............................1-34
Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger
Seat Position ............................................1-37
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-42
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-45
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-47
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-48
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-48
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...1-49
Air Bag Off Switch ........................................1-51
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-54
Restraint System Check ..................................1-55
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-55
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-56
1-1
Front Seats
Power Seats
Driver’s Seat
Horizontal Control
• Move the front of the seat control up or down to
adjust the front portion of the cushion.
• Move the rear of the seat control up or down to
adjust the rear portion of the cushion.
• Lift up or push down on the center of the seat
control to move the entire seat up or down.
• Slide the seat control forward or rearward to move
the seat forward or rearward.
Vertical Control
The vertical control is used to operate the power
lumbar.
Adjust the seat cushion using the horizontal control.
To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks
on page 1-4. Once the seat is in the desired position,
adjust the lumbar.
Power seat with memory seat controls shown
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seat.
1-2
Press the vertical control forward to increase support
and rearward to decrease support.
If your vehicle has the memory seat feature, you can
program seat positions for up to two drivers. See
Memory Seat on page 2-52 for more information.
Passenger’s Seat
Vertical Control
The vertical control is used to operate the power
lumbar.
Adjust the seat cushion using the horizontal control.
To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks
on page 1-4. Once the seat is in the desired position,
adjust the lumbar.
Press the vertical control forward to increase support
and rearward to decrease support.
Heated Seats
The power seat controls are located on the outboard
side of the passenger’s seat.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the switches are
located on the outboard
side of the driver’s
and passenger’s seats.
Horizontal Control
To adjust the seat, slide the control forward or rearward
to move the seat forward or rearward.
1-3
This feature will heat the lower cushion and lower back
of the driver’s and passenger’s seats.
Reclining Seatbacks
Press LO to turn the heater on low. Press HI to turn the
heater on high. Put the switch in the center position
to turn the heater off.
The ignition must be on for the heated seats to work.
Also, the passenger’s safety belt must be buckled for the
heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.
If you turn the ignition off when the heated seats are on,
the heated seats will turn off. They will come on again
when you restart the vehicle.
To recline the seatback, lift the lever on the outboard
side of the seat cushion.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you
want it. Pull up on the lever without pushing on the
seatback, and the seat will go to an upright position.
1-4
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Seatback Latches
{CAUTION:
The seatbacks fold forward.
To fold the seatback
forward, push the lever on
the side of the seatback
rearward and pull the
seatback forward.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
To return the seatback to the upright position, push it all
the way back until the latch catches. If the seatback
was reclined before being folded forward, it will return to
the reclined position.
1-6
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passenger’s belt is
fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-26.
1-7
In most states and all Canadian provinces, the law says
to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on
wheels.
1-8
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-9
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-10
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-11
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident — even one that isn’t your fault — you
and your passenger can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-21
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-24. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-12
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-20.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-13
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-14
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-15
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-17
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-18
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-19
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the passenger’s safety belt
properly, see Driver Position on page 1-12.
The passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the
driver’s safety belt — except for one thing. If you
ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way,
you will engage the child restraint locking feature. If
this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
1-20
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-21
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-22
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
The lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This
applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
1-23
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-24
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. A baby should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
1-25
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-26
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-27
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-28
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two
hip straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has
shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad
which rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached
to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to
the side.
1-29
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
The child restraint must be secured properly in the
passenger seat. If you want to secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the passenger’s seat, turn off the passenger’s
air bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-51 and
Securing a Child Restraint in the Passenger Seat
Position on page 1-37 for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-30
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating air bag. Be sure to turn off the
air bag before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the passenger seat position.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.”
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are
designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap be
anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
To locate the top strap anchor see “Top Strap Anchor
Location” following.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-31
Top Strap Anchor Location
The anchor point for the
top strap is a loop located
at the back of the
passenger side seat.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle is equipped with the LATCH system. It is
located in the passenger seat.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).
1-32
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
1-33
To assist you in locating the anchors for this child
restraint system, place your hand in a palm-up position
and reach up between the seat cushion and the
seatback.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
1-34
Your vehicle has a passenger air bag. There is an air
bag off switch in the glove box you can use to turn
off the passenger’s air bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-51 for more on this, including important
safety information.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating air bag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle unless
the passenger’s air bag has been turned off.
Unless the passenger’s air bag has been turned off,
never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
Here is why:
Even though the air bag off switch is designed
to turn off the passenger’s frontal air bag, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an air bag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with a
rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the passenger seat, always move the
passenger seat as far back as it will go.
1-35
{CAUTION:
2. Find the LATCH anchorages in the passenger seat.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-32.
3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the passenger’s
frontal air bag, it means that something may
be wrong with the air bag system. The
passenger’s frontal air bag could inflate even
though the switch is off. If this ever happens,
do not let anyone whom the national
government has identified as a member of a
passenger air bag risk group sit in the
passenger’s position (for example, do not
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-51.
1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s air bag. See Air
Bag Off Switch on page 1-51. If your child restraint
is forward-facing, always move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing it in this seat. See
Power Seats on page 1-2. Never use a rear-facing
child restraint in this seat unless the air bag
is off.
1-36
4. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
5. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-30.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the
anchor points.
If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on
the passenger’s air bag when you remove the
rear-facing child restraint from the vehicle unless the
person who will be sitting there is a member of a
passenger air bag risk group. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-51.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Passenger Seat Position
{CAUTION:
If the passenger’s frontal air bag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person will not have the extra protection of a
frontal air bag. In a crash, the air bag would
not be able to inflate and help protect the
person sitting there. Do not turn off the
passenger’s frontal air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See Air Bag Off
Switch on page 1-51 for more on this,
including important safety information.
Your vehicle has a passenger air bag. There is an air
bag off switch in the glove box you can use to turn
off the passenger’s air bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-51 for more on this, including important
safety information.
1-37
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating air bag. Do not use a
rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle unless
the passenger’s air bag has been turned off.
Unless the passenger’s air bag has been turned off,
never put a rear-facing child restraint in this vehicle.
Here is why:
Even though the air bag off switch is designed
to turn off the passenger’s frontal air bag, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an air bag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with a
rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the passenger seat, always move the
passenger seat as far back as it will go.
1-38
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the passenger’s
frontal air bag, it means that something may
be wrong with the air bag system. The
passenger’s frontal air bag could inflate even
though the switch is off. If this ever happens,
do not let anyone whom the national
government has identified as a member of a
passenger air bag risk group sit in the
passenger’s position (for example, do not
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-51.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a passenger’s air bag. If you are
using a rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make
sure the air bag is turned off. See Air Bag Off
Switch on page 1-51. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, always move the seat as far back
as it will go before securing it in this seat. See
Power Seats on page 1-2.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-32. See Top Strap
on page 1-30 if the child restraint has one.
1-39
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-40
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on
the passenger’s air bag when you remove the
rear-facing child restraint from the vehicle unless the
person who will be sitting there is a member of a
passenger air bag risk group. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-51.
{CAUTION:
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. You may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the passenger’s frontal air bag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person will not have the extra protection of a
frontal air bag. In a crash, the air bag would
not be able to inflate and help protect the
person sitting there. Do not turn off the
passenger’s frontal air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See Air Bag Off
Switch on page 1-51 for more on this,
including important safety information.
1-41
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags — a frontal air bag for
the driver, another frontal air bag for the passenger,
a side impact air bag for the driver, and another side
impact air bag for the passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
Frontal air bags for the driver and passenger
are designed to deploy only in moderate to
severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They
are not designed to inflate at all in rollover,
rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal air bags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful air bags have provided in the past.
CAUTION:
1-42
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The side impact air bags for the driver and
passenger are designed to inflate only in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an air
bag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating air bag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for air bag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with frontal air bags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Front
occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door.
1-43
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”
1-44
There is an air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-26
for more information.
Where Are the Air Bags?
The passenger’s frontal air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
1-45
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-46
The passenger’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. Do not let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.
The driver’s and passenger’s frontal air bags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.”
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air bags,
which adjust the amount of restraint according to crash
severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these air bags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front
of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not
move or deform, the threshold level for the reduced
deployment is about 12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h), and
the threshold level for a full deployment is about 20 to
25 mph (32 to 40 km/h). The threshold level can vary,
however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be
somewhat above or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and passenger’s frontal air bags
are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear impacts, or
in many side impacts because inflation would not
help the occupant.
1-47
Side impact air bags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag will
inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and
related hardware are all part of the air bag modules
inside the steering wheel, the instrument panel, and the
side of the front seatbacks closest to the door.
1-48
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal air bags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and passenger’s frontal
air bags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions
for vehicles with a driver’s and passenger’s side
impact air bag.
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal air bag and the
instrument panel for the passenger’s frontal air bag
and the side of the seatback closest to the driver’s
and/or passenger’s door. The parts of the bag that come
into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to
touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation
doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving
the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can not get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
1-49
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air
bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock
the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by
using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equipped
with a crash sensing and diagnostic module,
which records information about the frontal air bag
system. The module records information about
the readiness of the system, when the system
commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment. The module also records
speed, engine RPM, brake and throttle data. See
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders
on page 7-10 for more information.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for
service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the passenger’s air bag, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel or both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the
passenger’s air bag. Do not open or break the air
bag coverings.
1-50
Air Bag Off Switch
This switch should only be turned to AIR BAG OFF if
the person in the passenger’s position is a member of a
passenger risk group identified by the national
government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• my vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Your vehicle has a switch inside the glovebox that you
can use to turn off the passenger’s frontal air bag.
1-51
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear seat(s)
whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12 sometimes
must ride in the front because no space is available
in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
• the child has a medical condition which, according to
the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the child
to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
• causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
• makes the potential harm from the passenger air
bag in a crash greater than the potential harm
from turning off the air bag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or
windshield in a crash.
1-52
{CAUTION:
If the passenger’s frontal air bag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person will not have the extra protection of a
frontal air bag. In a crash, the frontal air bag
would not be able to inflate and help protect
the person sitting there. Do not turn off the
passenger’s frontal air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group.
To turn off the passenger’s
frontal air bag, insert your
ignition key into the switch,
push in, and move the
switch to AIR BAG OFF.
The air bag off light, located on the roof panel above
the rearview mirror, will come on and stay on to let you
know that the passenger’s frontal air bag is off. See
Air Bag Off Light on page 3-28.
1-53
The passenger’s frontal air bag will remain off until you
turn it back on again.
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the passenger’s
frontal air bag, it means that something may
be wrong with the air bag system. The
passenger’s frontal air bag could inflate even
though the switch is off. If this ever happens,
do not let anyone whom the national
government has identified as a member of a
passenger air bag risk group sit in the
passenger’s position (for example, do not
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
1-54
To turn the passenger’s
frontal air bag on again,
insert your ignition key into
the switch, push in, and
move the switch to the on
position.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-13.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close to
an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the air
bag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-55
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or LATCH
system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-56
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-6
Door Locks ....................................................2-6
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-7
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-8
Leaving Your Vehicle ......................................2-8
Tailgate ........................................................2-8
Windows .........................................................2-9
Power Windows ............................................2-10
Sun Visors ...................................................2-11
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-11
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-11
Passlock® ....................................................2-13
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-13
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-13
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-14
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-15
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-16
Parking Brake ..............................................2-18
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-19
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-20
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-21
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-21
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-22
Mirrors ...........................................................2-23
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-23
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
HomeLink® ...............................................2-23
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ........................2-24
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-25
Outside Automatic Dimming Heated Mirror ........2-25
HomeLink® Transmitter ...................................2-26
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter .........2-27
Storage Areas ................................................2-30
Glove Box ...................................................2-30
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-30
Instrument Panel Storage Area .......................2-30
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-30
Map Pocket .................................................2-30
Cargo Cover ................................................2-31
Floor Tracks ................................................2-35
Cargo Net System ........................................2-36
Side-Saddle Storage .....................................2-41
Convertible Top ..............................................2-45
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-52
Memory Seat ...............................................2-52
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
locks except the center
console.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer for
assistance. In an emergency, contact Chevrolet
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6 for more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
Center Console Storage Area Key
A separate key is provided
for locking the center
console storage area.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
You can lock and unlock your doors and cargo area
from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using
the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with
your vehicle.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4
W (Unlock):
When you
press unlock, the driver’s
door will unlock
automatically, the parking
lamps may flash, the
horn may sound, and the
interior lights will turn on.
If your vehicle has the memory seat feature and you
have previously programmed a seat position, the driver’s
seat will move to that position when you press the
unlock button. See Memory Seat on page 2-52 for more
information.
Q (Lock):
Press lock to lock all the doors. Press lock
again within three seconds and the horn will chirp.
F (Cargo Cover Release):
To release the cargo
cover, press the button with this symbol on it. The
convertible top must be all the way up or down for this
feature to work properly. The cargo cover can also
be released using the cargo cover release button
located in the glovebox. See Cargo Cover on page 2-31
for more information.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
L(Remote Alarm): When the button with the horn
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter is
pressed, the horn will sound and the headlamps and
taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds. This can
be turned off by pressing the horn button again, or by
waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can program different feedback settings for up to
two drivers using the Driver Information Center (DIC).
For more information see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-44.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a RFA #
BATTERY LOW message when the transmitter battery
is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-48.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
2-5
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
1. Insert a thin coin in the slot between the covers of
the transmitter housing. Gently pry the transmitter
apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
2-6
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-4 for more information.
Your power door lock
switch is located on the
console switchbank.
See Center Console
Switchbank on page 3-17
for more information.
To lock or unlock the driver’s door from the outside with
the key, insert the key and turn it toward the rear (lock) or
toward the front (unlock) of the vehicle.
From the inside, use the manual or power door locks.
To lock or unlock either door from the inside, pull up or
push down on the manual lock.
K (Unlock):
Press this symbol to unlock the doors
from inside your vehicle.
Q (Lock):
Press this symbol to lock the doors from
inside your vehicle.
2-7
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Close the doors and turn on the ignition. If all the doors
are closed, every time you move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) all of the doors will lock. And, every time
you stop and move the shift lever into PARK (P),
the doors will unlock. If someone needs to get out while
you’re not in PARK (P), have that person use the
manual or power lock. When the door is closed again, it
will not lock automatically. Just use the manual or
power lock to lock the door again. If you need to lock
the doors before shifting out of PARK (P), just use
the manual or power lock switch to lock the doors.
Customizing Your Automatic Door
Locks Feature
The automatic door locks can be programmed to the
preferred settings for up to two drivers. See DIC Vehicle
Personalization on page 3-55 for more information.
2-8
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your key, open your
door and set the lock from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Tailgate
To open the tailgate, do the following:
1. Open the cargo cover using the remote keyless
entry transmitter or the cargo cover release
button in the glovebox. See Remote Keyless Entry
System Operation on page 2-4 and Cargo Cover
on page 2-31 for more information.
2. Pull up on the handle inside and lower the tailgate.
To close the tailgate, do the following:
1. Close the cargo cover before closing the tailgate.
2. Push the tailgate upward to return it to its upright,
latched position. Push and pull on the tailgate to
make sure it is secure.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-9
Express Down Window
Power Windows
The driver’s and
passenger’s power window
switches are located on
the center console
switchbank.
Both driver’s and passenger’s window switches have
the express-down feature. Tap the driver’s or
passenger’s power window switch and immediately
release. The window will lower completely. To stop the
express-down feature from lowering the window
completely, simply tap the switch again or press the
lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter. See
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-4
for more information.
To close the window, press and hold the up arrow.
Programming the Power Windows
See Center Console Switchbank on page 3-17 for more
information on location.
When you open a door, the window will automatically
lower about a half inch. When the door is closed,
the window will then close. If you wish to re-open the
window once it’s closed, press and hold the bottom
of the power window switch to lower the window. Press
and hold the top of the switch with the up arrow to
raise the window.
The ignition must be in ACCESSORY or RUN for the
window switches to work.
2-10
If the battery on your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working properly, you will need
to reprogram the power windows for them to work
properly. Before reprogramming, you will need to replace
or recharge your vehicle’s battery.
To program the windows, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACCESSORY or RUN, close
the doors.
2. Fully lower the windows using the driver’s power
window switches. Then raise the windows
completely.
The windows are now programmed.
Sun Visors
With this system, the
security light will flash
as you open the door
(if your ignition is off).
To block out glare, you can swing down the sun visors.
You can also move them from side to side.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to expose the
mirror. The light will automatically come on. The light will
go out when you close the cover.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle is equipped with a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
This light reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The security
light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after approximately 30 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the security light goes off.
If a locked door is opened with the key, without the key,
or without the remote keyless entry transmitter, the
alarm will go off. The headlamps and parking lamps will
flash for two minutes, and the horn will sound for
30 seconds, then will turn off to save the battery power.
You can disable the alarm using the remote keyless
entry transmitter or by putting the key in the ignition and
starting the vehicle.
2-11
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual
door lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that
you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if
the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote
keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any
other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by
pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any
other way.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
When the alarm is set the power door unlock switch is
not operational.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-84.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your dealer.
2-12
Passlock®
®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is
turned with a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the
ignition lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system
is disabled and the vehicle will not start.
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN. See Security Light on page 3-37.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this
time. You may also want to check the fuse. See
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-84. See your
dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow —for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your
new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard
stops with new linings can mean premature
wear and earlier replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every time you get new
brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-39 for more information.
2-13
Ignition Positions
A (OFF): This is the only position in which you can
insert or remove the key. This position locks the ignition,
steering wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent
feature.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as
the radio in the accessory ignition position may
drain the battery and prevent your vehicle from
starting. Do not operate your vehicle in the
accessory ignition position for a long period
of time.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things like
the radio and the windshield wipers when the engine
is off.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in OFF and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the key
hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of these works, then your vehicle
needs service.
2-14
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Starting Your Engine
When starting your engine in very cold weather (below
0°F or 18 °C), do this:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position — that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the
vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the
same thing, but this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. At 15 seconds, the
starter will automatically be disengaged. Wait
about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
2-15
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Your automatic transmission has a shift lever located on
the center console.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It’s
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle can’t move easily.
2-16
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-19. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-39.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transmission
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift
out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever, and
push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) (press the
button in on the console shift lever) as you maintain
brake application. Then move the shift lever into
the gear you wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on
page 2-20.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-31.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
If you need more power for passing, and you’re:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
2-17
DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for
off-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating the
vehicle under any of these conditions.
Parking Brake
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than DRIVE (D) and THIRD (3). You
can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your
speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but
then you would also want to use your brakes off and on.
You can also use SECOND (2) for starting your
vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than THIRD (3) and
SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in
deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1)
while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you are
stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-18
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brake lever up. If the ignition is on, the
brake system warning light will come on. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 3-30 for more
information.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Then push the release button in as you move the
parking brake lever all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the lever while pushing the lever all the
way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-18 for more information.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
remove the key from the ignition, the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
2-19
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold down
the regular brake pedal. See if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-20
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting
Into PARK (P)” listed previously in this section.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system You have to fully apply your regular
brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when
the ignition is in RUN. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-16.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever, push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P), and release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and move the shift lever into the gear
you wish.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-21
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-21.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-26.
2-22
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-19.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-39.
Mirrors
Mirror Operation
Manual Rearview Mirror
The mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you. A time delay feature prevents
rapid changing from the day to night positions while
driving under lights and through traffic.
Your vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror. You
can adjust the mirror for day or night driving. Press
the tab forward, or away from you, for day driving. Pull
the tab back, or toward you, for night driving.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with HomeLink®
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with map lamps. The mirror also has HomeLink®
Transmitter buttons. For more information about this
feature, see HomeLink® Transmitter on page 2-26.
[ (On/Off): The automatic dimming feature is
automatically activated when the vehicle is started. The
automatic dimming feature is turned on or off by
pressing this button located on the lower part of the
mirror. Press and hold the button for up to three seconds
to turn this feature on or off.
T (Indicator Light):
This light will turn on when the
automatic dimming feature is active.
+ (Map Lamps): Press this button to turn the map
lamps on and off.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing.
2-23
Outside Power Heated Mirrors
Your vehicle has outside heated power mirrors.
The power mirror control is
located on the driver’s door.
If you reach the mirror’s end of the travel position in any
direction, the mirror will enter a ratcheting mode. This
action is harmless. To stop this action, back the
mirror up by moving the knob in the opposite direction.
Both mirrors are also heated when you activate the
rear window defogger. See “Rear Window Defogger”
under Climate Control System on page 3-19 for
more information.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
to return the mirrors to their original unfolded position
before driving.
To adjust the power mirrors, do the following:
1. Turn the knob toward the mirror you desire to
adjust.
2. Move the knob in the direction you want the
mirror to go.
3. Return the knob to the center position once the
mirrors are adjusted.
2-24
Outside Convex Mirror
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see
more from the driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Automatic Dimming Heated
Mirror
If you have this feature, the driver’s side outside
rearview mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps
behind you. This feature is controlled using the on and
off settings on the automatic dimming rearview mirror.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
HomeLink® on page 2-23 for more information.
Both outside mirrors are also heated when you activate
the rear window defogger. See “Rear Window
Defogger” under Climate Control System on page 3-19.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
to return the mirrors to their original unfolded position
before driving.
2-25
HomeLink® Transmitter
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
Transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
HomeLink®, a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand−held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink® information can be found on the internet at
www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
2-26
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink®
Transmitter
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the
internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
2-27
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
2-28
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” Do not
repeat Step 1.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink®” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”
to complete.
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” next.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink®.”
2-29
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, pull on the lever. Use your door
key to lock or unlock it.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle has one cupholder located on your
instrument panel and one cupholder that is removable
and snaps to the passenger’s side of the center console
in the bracket provided.
2-30
To open the cupholder on the instrument panel, push in
the center of the cupholder door. The cupholder will
then release and move outward toward you for use.
To return the cupholder to its closed position, push in the
center of the cupholder door near the top. If you
press in the center middle of the cupholder door, the
cupholder will not close properly.
Instrument Panel Storage Area
There is a storage tray located to the right of the
steering wheel on the instrument panel. Press on the
tray to release it. The tray will slide out of the instrument
panel toward you. You can then put small items into
the tray. To close the tray, push forward on the center of
the tray until it latches back into the instrument panel.
Center Console Storage Area
Your center console has a storage area that can be
locked and unlocked with the center console storage
key. See Keys on page 2-2 for more information.
Map Pocket
The map/storage pockets are located on both the driver
and passenger side doors.
Cargo Cover
To open your cargo cover area manually, do the
following:
Opening the Cargo Cover
Press this button located in
the glovebox to release
the cargo cover.
1. Locate the control box under the rear of the vehicle
on the driver’s side, behind the rear tire.
You can also open the cargo cover using the remote
keyless entry transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry System Operation on page 2-4 for more
information. The tailgate must be open for you to close
the cargo cover. See Tailgate on page 2-8 for more
information.
If you cannot open your cargo cover area using your
remote keyless entry transmitter you should first
check the battery. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-4.
If changing the battery does not work, you may
need to replace the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-84 for more information.
Convertible top release tool shown
2. Insert the convertible top release tool and turn it to
activate the emergency release. The convertible top
release tool is provided by the dealer and stored
in the glovebox.
2-31
Removing the Cargo Cover
Your vehicle’s cargo cover can be removed. You will
need more than one person to remove the cargo cover.
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 2-8 for
instructions.
2. Disconnect the
electrical connector
located on the
underside of the cargo
cover near the front
of the bed.
2-32
3. Locate and remove the
bolts that hold the cargo
cover in place. There is
one bolt on each side
near the front of the
cargo area.
4. Slide the cover rearward and then lift up on the
passenger’s side of the cargo cover. Then have
another person lift the driver’s side of the cargo
cover.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the cargo
cover.
2-33
Emergency Cargo Cover Release
Handle
Your vehicle has a glow-in-the-dark emergency cargo
cover release handle located in the cargo area on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. This handle will glow
following exposure to light. Pull the release handle up to
open the cargo cover from the inside.
Cargo Tie Downs
There are four cargo
tie downs in the rear
cargo area.
Notice: Using the emergency cargo cover release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the cargo area may damage it. Use the
emergency cargo cover release handle only to help
you open the cargo cover.
2-34
Use the cargo tie downs to secure cargo in the cargo
storage area.
Floor Tracks
Your vehicle has floor tracks and side rails that can be
used to install accessories in the cargo area of your
vehicle. The floor tracks have covers that can be
removed so that available accessories can be installed.
For more information on available accessories for
your vehicle, see your dealer.
To install or remove the floor track covers, follow these
steps:
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 2-8.
3. Slide the endcap rearward to remove it.
2. Locate and remove the fastener at the tailgate end
of the floor track.
2-35
Cargo Net System
Your vehicle may have a cargo net system that attaches
to the side rails and tailgate to help keep items in
your cargo area from moving around.
4. Insert the cover into the floor track and slide it all
the way forward.
5. Reinstall the floor track fastener and endcap by
reversing Steps 2 and 3.
6. Slide the floor track cover rearward until it rests
against the endcap.
7. Repeat the above steps to install a cover for the
other floor track.
To remove the floor track covers, reverse the installation
procedure.
Additional cargo strips are installed by attaching them to
the Velcro® strips located in the carpeted cargo area.
2-36
To install the cargo net system, do the following:
1. If your vehicle has the side-saddle storage bins
installed, remove the bins before installing the cargo
net. See Side-Saddle Storage on page 2-41 for
instructions. Once the cargo net system has been
installed, the side-saddle storage bins can be
reinstalled.
2. Locate and remove the endcaps from the forward
ends of the cargo area side rails.
3. Insert a locking tab into the forward end of each side
rail and slide the tabs rearward. Then reinstall the
endcaps on the forward ends of the side rails.
2-37
4. Loosen the knobs located on top of the telescoping
cross bar by turning them counterclockwise.
2-38
5. Position the cross bar vertically between the side
rails as shown.
6. Insert the tabs located at each end of the cross bar
into the side rails.
You may need to adjust the length of the cross bar
to make it fit between the side rails.
7. Turn the cross bar so that it is horizontal as shown.
2-39
Be sure to use the D-rings supplied with the cargo
net system that have 0.9 inches (22 mm) studs.
Using other D-rings will not work because the studs
will not be the correct length and the cargo net
system will not be secured properly.
13. Clip the cargo net to the tailgate D-rings with the
label facing up and on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
8. Slide the locking tabs in the side rails until they are
aligned with the knobs on the cross bar as shown
and loosely tighten the knobs.
9. Slide the cross bar to the desired location and
adjust the length of the bar as necessary.
10. Tighten all the cross bar knobs.
11. Remove the pushpins located on the outboard
sides of the tailgate near the top.
12. Install and tighten a D-ring into each hole on the
tailgate.
2-40
14. Clip the other end of the cargo net to the
telescoping cross bar as shown.
Side-Saddle Storage
Your vehicle may have a side-saddle storage system to
store items on either side of the rear cargo area.
15. Wrap the Velcro® strap around the cross bar
as shown to secure the middle portion of the
cargo net.
Notice: Loading items that weigh more than
75 lbs. (34 kg) in the cargo net could cause damage
to the cargo net and/or your vehicle. Do not load
heavy items in the cargo net.
Be sure to load items in the cargo area according to the
proper load limits. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-32 for more information.
The cargo net system can be removed by reversing the
installation procedure.
2-41
The side-saddle storage system is attached to the
tracks on the floor and side rails of the cargo area and
is removable.
To install the side-saddle storage bins, do the following:
2. Insert a locking tab into the forward end of the side
rail and slide the tab rearward. Then reinstall the
endcap on the forward end of the side rail.
1. Locate and remove the endcap on the side rail near
the forward end of the cargo area.
2-42
3. If your vehicle has the floor track covers installed,
they must first be removed before continuing the
installation of the side-saddle storage bins.
See Floor Tracks on page 2-35 for instructions.
4. Prepare to insert a tapping plate into the floor track
by locating the end of the plate that has the
shortest distance between the end of the plate and
the first stud. The distance will measure
approximately 3.9 inches (100 mm).
5. Insert a tapping plate into the tailgate end of the
floor track and slide it forward, making sure that
the three studs on the plate are facing upward.
2-43
6. Place one of the side-saddle storage bins on the
floor track so that the studs on the tapping plate
line up with the holes in the bottom of the bin.
2-44
7. Slide the locking tab forward in the side rail until the
hole in the middle lines up with the metal bracket
on the side-saddle storage bin.
10. Once the bin has been situated properly, fully
tighten the three wing nuts in the bottom of the
bin and the D-ring on the side rail.
11. Install the locking lid on the storage bin.
Each storage bin is delivered with two keys.
If additional keys are needed, your dealer can create
them using the key code imprinted on each key.
12. Repeat the above steps to install the other
storage bin.
To remove the storage bin(s), reverse the previous
steps.
8. Insert one of the D-rings through the bracket and
locking plate and loosely tighten it to the side rail.
Be sure to use the D-rings supplied with the
side-saddle storage system that have 0.3 inches
(8 mm) studs. Using other D-rings will not work
because the studs will be too long and the storage
bins will not be secured properly. If you need
additional D-rings and locking tabs, contact your
dealer.
9. Loosely install the three wing nuts on the studs in
the bottom of the storage bin.
Be sure to load items in the cargo area according to the
proper load limits. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-32 for more information.
Convertible Top
Roof Tonneau
Your vehicle has a roof tonneau that is raised or
lowered along with the convertible top using the
convertible top switch located on the center console
switchbank. See “Convertible Top Operation” following
in this section for more information.
2-45
If you are unable to raise or lower your roof tonneau
using the convertible top switch, verify that the
cargo cover is closed. The roof tonneau will not raise or
lower if the cargo cover is open. See Cargo Cover on
page 2-31 and for more information. There will also be a
message displayed on the on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-48 for more information on possible DIC
messages and how to clear them from the display.
If the cargo area is closed and you still cannot operate
the roof tonneau, check to see if a fuse is blown.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-84 for more
information.
Contact your dealer if you are still unable to operate the
roof tonneau.
You may need to raise the roof tonneau manually in the
event of a power loss. See “Convertible Top Operation”
for instructions.
Convertible Top Operation
Notice: If you operate the convertible top switch
continuously while the ignition is in ACCESSORY,
the battery will drain and you might not be able
to start your vehicle. Do not use the convertible top
switch for extended periods of time when the
ignition is in ACCESSORY.
2-46
The ignition must be in RUN or ACCESSORY and your
foot must be on the brake in order to raise or lower
the convertible top. The cargo cover must also be closed
for the convertible top to work properly.
Operate the convertible top by pressing the convertible
top switch located on the console switchback. See
Center Console Switchbank on page 3-17 for more
information on location.
{CAUTION:
Moving parts of the convertible top can be
dangerous. People can be injured by the
convertible top and its mechanism. Keep
people away from your vehicle when you are
lowering or raising the top.
a (Top Open): Press and hold this symbol on
the convertible top switch to open the convertible
top. The windows will lower automatically when the top
begins to lower. Two chimes will sound when the
convertible top is fully opened.
b (Top Closed):
Press and hold this symbol on
the convertible top switch to close the convertible
top. Two chimes will sound when the top is fully closed.
If you cannot raise or lower the convertible top by using
your convertible top switch, you may need to replace
the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-84
for more information.
If you still cannot operate your convertible top, contact
your dealer.
You may need to raise the roof tonneau and convertible
top manually in the event of a power loss. You will
need two people to lift the roof tonneau and convertible
top when using the following procedure. To manually
raise the roof tonneau and convertible top, do the
following:
1. Turn the ignition to OFF.
2. Be sure the cargo cover is closed. See Cargo
Cover on page 2-31 and Remote Keyless Entry
System Operation on page 2-4 for more information.
3. Open both doors.
4. In the area behind the seats, locate the two sets of
cables behind the carpet flaps. The cables on the
driver’s side of the vehicle are located behind
the tire inflator kit. The tire inflator kit must be
removed to access the cables. See Tire Inflator Kit
on page 5-67 for instructions on how to remove
the tire inflator kit.
5. Locate the loops at the ends of the cables.
One has a red band on it, and the other has
a green band.
The cable with the green band opens the tonneau
latch, and the cable with the red band closes it.
6. Using the release tool from the convertible top,
hook the tool into the green loop.
The convertible top release tool is provided when
you purchase your new SSR from the dealer.
It is stored in the glovebox.
2-47
7. Pull the green cable with the release tool upward at
a 45 degree angle until the cable is pulled tight and
the roof tonneau latch is released.
8. Repeat Steps 4 through 7 on the other side of the
vehicle.
9. You will know the latches have been released when
the roof tonneau can be raised. If you cannot raise
the roof tonneau, repeat Steps 4 through 7 on
both sides of the vehicle until the roof tonneau can
be raised.
2-48
10. Lift up on the roof tonneau and raise it to the
upright position.
11. Grasp the front panel of the convertible top and
pull up.
You will need more than one person to do this. One
person working on each side of the vehicle is best.
Driver’s side roof latch shown,
passenger’s side similar
12. Insert the front panel into the roof latches.
One person should hold the convertible top in the
closed position by pushing it up in the rear,
while another person performs the next steps.
2-49
13. Remove the plastic cap
located between the
sun visors. Turn the cap
in either direction about
a quarter of a turn,
then pull downward to
remove it.
14. Slide the tool side of the
convertible top release
tool until the entire tool
forms a right angle as
shown.
15. Insert the convertible top release tool into the latch
closing mechanism between the sun visors and turn
it counterclockwise until the roof latches are
secured and the convertible top is fully closed.
Then replace the plastic cap.
2-50
16. From the upright position, push down on the outer
area of the boot cover panel where the hinges and
hydraulic cylinders are located to separate it
from the roof tonneau. Then, continue to push the
boot cover panel down as far as it will go.
Boot cover panel down, roof tonneau up
17. Push down the roof tonneau cover. Be sure the
boot cover clears the rear roof panel.
18. Latch the tonneau panel. Pull the red cable with the
release tool until the cable is pulled tight and the
roof tonneau latch engages.
2-51
19. Repeat Step 18 on the other side of the vehicle.
Vehicle Personalization
20. You will know the latches are engaged if the
roof tonneau cannot be raised. If the roof tonneau
can be raised, repeat Step 18 on both sides of
the vehicle until the roof tonneau cannot be raised.
Memory Seat
21. Once the roof tonneau is closed, adjust the cables
located behind the seats. Pull the cable with the red
band until both cables are the same length.
Repeat this step on the other side of the vehicle.
22. Check the roof tonneau to make sure it is secure
before driving.
Your vehicle may have a memory driver’s seat. The
controls are located on the outboard of the driver’s seat,
and are used to program and recall memory settings
for the driver’s seating positions.
2-52
Adjust the driver’s seat to the desired position. Press
the SET button, then press and hold button 1 (for
Driver 1) for three seconds. A double chime will sound
to let you know that the position has been stored.
A second seating position can be programmed by
repeating the procedure with a second driver and
pressing button 2 for three seconds. Each time button 1
or 2 is pressed and released while the vehicle is in
PARK (P), a single chime will sound, and the memory
position will be recalled.
The seat positions can also be recalled by placing the
key in the ignition if programmed to do so through
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls or memory
buttons.
Further programming for automatic seat can be done
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See
DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-55 for more
information.
If you use the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter to enter your vehicle, the preset driver’s
seat positions will be recalled if programmed to do so
through the Driver Information Center (DIC). The
numbers on the back of the transmitters, 1 or 2,
correspond to the numbers on the memory controls.
2-53
✍ NOTES
2-54
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-3
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-4
Horn .............................................................3-4
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-5
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-12
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-15
Center Console Switchbank ............................3-17
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-17
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Climate Control System .................................3-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-22
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-24
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-25
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-25
Tachometer .................................................3-25
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-26
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-26
Air Bag Off Light ..........................................3-28
Charging System Light ..................................3-29
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-30
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-31
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light ...3-31
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-32
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-32
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-36
Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-37
Security Light ...............................................3-37
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-38
Reduced Engine Power Light .........................3-38
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-39
Check Gages Warning Light ...........................3-39
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-40
Auxiliary Gage Package .................................3-41
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-44
DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-44
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-48
DIC Vehicle Personalization ............................3-55
Audio System(s) .............................................3-61
Setting the Time ...........................................3-61
Radio with CD ..............................................3-62
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-71
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-85
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-86
Radio Reception ...........................................3-87
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-87
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-87
Integrated Windshield Antenna ........................3-87
3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
3-2
A. Climate Control Vents. See Climate Control System
on page 3-19.
B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-24.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.
D. Exterior and Interior Lamps Control. See Exterior
Lamps on page 3-12 and Interior Lamps on
page 3-15.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC) buttons. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-44.
F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio Steering
Wheel Controls on page 3-86.
G. Storage Tray. See Instrument Panel Storage Area
on page 2-30.
H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-61.
I. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-19.
J. Transmission Shift Lever. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 2-16.
K. Cupholder. See Cupholder(s) on page 2-30.
L. Glovebox. See Glove Box on page 2-30.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-3
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
the top of the steering
column.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your
vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on the
steering wheel pad.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work. The flashers will stop if you step on
the brake.
3-4
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
allow more room for the driver to enter and exit the
vehicle.
The tilt lever is located on
the driver’s side of the
steering column, under the
turn signal lever.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever
toward you. Move the wheel to a comfortable level, then
release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
•
•
•
•
•
•
G Turn and Lane Change Signals
3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass Feature
N Windshield Wipers
JQ Windshield Washer
I Cruise Control
3-5
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it. The bottom of the outside
rearview mirrors may also be equipped with lane change
indicators.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn
signal.
3-6
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-84 and for burned-out bulbs.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, a different turn signal flasher is
used. With this flasher installed, the signal indicator will
flash even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check
the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly to make
sure they are working.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal. You will also receive a DIC message. See
“Turn Signal On” under DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 3-48 for more information. To turn off the chime,
move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high beam, push
the lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Windshield Wipers
N (Windshield Wipers):
To use the windshield
wipers, turn the band with the wiper symbol on it.
8(Mist):
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
Delayed Wipers: You can set the wiper speed for a
long or short delay between wipes. This can be
very useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to one of
the dashed marks on the lever to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter the
delay.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings.
1 (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
3-7
9(Off): Turn the band to this symbol to turn of your
windshield wipers.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can not drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
LQ(Windshield Washer):
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
To spray washer fluid on
the windshield, press the paddle. The wipers will
clear the window and then either stop or return to your
preset speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
3-8
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
Setting Cruise Control
Your cruise control is
located at the end of your
turn signal/multifunction
lever.
9 (Off): This position turns the cruise control system
off and cancels memory of a set speed.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The
accelerator pedal will not go down.
R (On):
Move the switch to this position to turn the
cruise control system on.
The Cruise light on the
instrument panel cluster
will illuminate when
the cruise control is
engaged.
S (Resume/Accelerate):
Move the switch to this
position to resume a set speed or to accelerate.
T (Set):
Press this button, located at the end of the
lever, to set a speed.
3-9
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you
can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate, the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to
the speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press and hold the button at the end of the lever
until you reach the lower speed you want, then
release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
and release the set button. Each time you do this,
you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
3-10
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise switch to off, or
• Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-11
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps control operates the following
systems:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Headlamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
License Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Interior Courtesy Lamps
O (Fog Lamp Indicator Light): This light illuminates
when the fog lamps are turned on. See “Fog Lamps”
later in this section for more information.
O(Exterior and Interior Lamps Controls):
These
controls (B) are located to the left of the steering wheel
and are used to operate the exterior and interior
lamps. Information on the exterior lamps follows.
D (Interior Lamps Control):
The interior lamp control
(A) is used to adjust the brightness of the instrument
panel lights. For more information on interior lamps, see
Interior Lamps on page 3-15.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turning the
exterior lamps control to this position activates the
automatic headlamp system. See “Automatic Headlamp
System” following in this section for more information.
;(Parking Lamps):
Turning the exterior lamps
control to this position turns on the parking lamps,
license plate lamps, the sidemarker lamps and
the instrument panel lights.
2(Headlamps):
Turning the exterior lamps control to
this position turns on the headlamps, together with
the previously listed lamps and lights.
3-12
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights when the exterior lamps knob is
turned to AUTO. The radio lights will also be on.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the top
of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered or
the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your lights when driving
through a parking garage, heavy overcast weather
or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
You may be able to turn off your automatic headlamp
system. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later
in this section for more information.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See “Instrument
Panel Brightness” under Interior Lamps on page 3-15.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Lamps On Reminder
A reminder tone will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on, the driver’s door
is open and your ignition is in OFF or ACCESSORY.
To turn the tone off, turn the knob all the way
counterclockwise. In the automatic mode, the headlamps
turn off once the ignition key is in OFF.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off.
Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake,
or until you shift out of PARK (P).
3-13
Daytime Running Lamps
Fog Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
Use your fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions. Your ignition must be in RUN for your
fog lamps to work.
The DRL system will make your headlamps come on
at reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on.
The exterior lamps knob is in AUTO.
The light sensor detects daytime light.
The transmission is not in PARK (P).
When the DRL are on, only your headlamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular headlamps.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL off, put your vehicle’s
transmission in PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until
you shift out of PARK (P).
3-14
-(Fog Lamps): Press this button located on the
exterior lamps control to turn the fog lamps on or off.
The fog lamps will go off whenever you turn on the
high-beam headlamps. When the high beams are turned
off, the fog lamps will come on again.
O (Fog Lamp Indicator Light): This light located on
the exterior lamps control illuminates when the fog
lamps are turned on.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
O(Exterior and Interior Lamp Controls):
These
controls (B) are used to operate the exterior and interior
lamps. Information on the interior lamps follows. For
more information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 3-12.
D (Interior Lamp Control): The interior lamp control
(A) is located to the left of the steering wheel and is
used to adjust the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
Press lightly on the interior lamp control and release.
The control will extend outward. Turn the control
clockwise to brighten and counterclockwise to dim the
instrument panel lights. Press on the control to return it
to the stored position.
3-15
Exit Lighting
Front Map Lamps
With the exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on
when you remove the key from the ignition to help you
see while exiting the vehicle.
If your vehicle has front map lamps, they are located on
the inside rearview mirror. They will automatically
come on for about 40 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter or
until the ignition key is turned to RUN or ACCESSORY.
The lamps will also stay on for about 40 seconds
after you exit the vehicle unless you lock the doors with
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Parade Dimming
This feature prohibits the dimming of your instrument
panel displays during daylight while your headlamps are
on. When the light sensor reads darkness outside,
you will be able to dim your instrument panel displays
once again.
You can also turn the lamps on and off by pressing the
button near each lamp.
Perimeter Lighting
Battery Rundown Protection
When the button with the unlock symbol on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the DRL, parking
lamps and back-up lamps will come on if it is dark
enough outside.
This feature shuts off all lamps that are left on for more
than 10 minutes when the ignition is off. This will
keep your battery from running down.
This feature can be personalized for up to two drivers.
See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 3-55 for
more information.
3-16
Center Console Switchbank
Accessory Power Outlets
The following controls are located on your center
console switchbank:
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
There is an accessory power outlet located on either
side of the ashtray on the instrument panel, and
there is an outlet in the rear cargo area. A small cap
must be removed to access an accessory power outlet.
When not using an outlet be sure to cover it with the
protective cap.
The accessory power outlets will only operate when the
ignition is in ACCESSORY or RUN and for 10 minutes
after turning the ignition to OFF.
A. Driver Power Window. See Power Windows on
page 2-10.
B. Traction Control System (TCS). See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4-9.
C. Convertible Top. See Convertible Top on page 2-45.
D. Power Door Locks. See Power Door Locks on
page 2-7.
E. Passenger Power Window. See Power Windows on
page 2-10.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
3-17
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-18
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle has an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To access, push the upper edge of the center instrument
panel door until it clicks and then release. The door
will open to expose the ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Climate Controls
Temperature Knob
Climate Control System
The left knob on the control panel is used to adjust the
temperature of the air in the vehicle. Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the temperature.
#(Air Conditioning):
A. Temperature Knob
B. Fan Knob
C. Mode Knob
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Press this button located on
the temperature knob to turn the air-conditioning system
on or off. An indicator light on the button will come on
to let you know the air conditioning is activated.
When the system is on, this setting cools and
dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle and directs it
through the floor ducts as well as the instrument
panel outlets.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
The air conditioning will not function if the fan is
turned off.
3-19
Fan Knob
Mode Knob
The center knob on the control panel is used to control
the fan speed. Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
The right knob on the control panel is used to direct the
airflow inside your vehicle. Turn the knob to select
one of the following modes:
? (Recirculation):
This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help
heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button on the fan knob to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. An indicator light on the button will
come on to let you know the recirculation mode
is activated.
H (Vent):
Recirculation is only available in the bi-level and vent
modes. If you push the recirculation button while
the system is in any other mode, the light on the button
will flash to indicate that recirculation is not available.
6 (Floor):
3-20
Select this mode to direct air to the
instrument panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level):
Select this mode to direct approximately
half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and the
remaining air to the floor outlets and the defroster
and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
Select this mode to direct air to the floor
outlets. Recirculation does not work in this mode.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield and side windows. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to
remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
/(Floor/Defog):
This mode directs half of the air to
the windshield and the side window outlets and the other
half to the floor outlets. When you select this mode,
the system runs the air-conditioning compressor unless
the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
0 (Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and the floor outlets. When you select this mode,
the system runs the air-conditioning compressor
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
1 (Maximum Defrost):
This mode directs most of
the air to the windshield, with some air directed to
the side window outlets and the floor outlets. The rear
window defogger and heated outside mirrors will turn on,
and the fan speed will be at the highest setting (5).
The temperature will be at the hottest setting also.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-21
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is on.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the levers located in
the center of each outlet to
change the direction of
the airflow.
= (Rear): Press this button on the right knob to turn
the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator light
on the button will come on to let you know that the rear
window defogger is activated.
When the rear defogger button is pressed, the outside
heated mirrors will warm to help clear any fog or
frost from the surface of the mirrors.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear
the inside rear window may damage the rear
window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside of the rear
window with sharp objects.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
3-22
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem, check the section that
tells you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly,
and even dangerous. So please get to know your
warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-44 for
more information.
3-23
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, about how much fuel you’ve used, and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
3-24
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle
has been driven since you last set the trip odometer
to zero.
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Turn the ignition to RUN and press the
trip information button located on the steering wheel.
See DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-44 for more
information.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero, and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Your trip odometer is part of your Driver Information
Center (DIC). The trip information button toggles
to display your trip odometer, Trip A, and Trip B
functions. See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Controls and
Displays on page 3-44 for more information.
Tachometer
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Fuel will shut off at about 6500 rpm. It will turn back on
again once the vehicle rpm drops below 6500.
3-25
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Air Bag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the air bag symbol.
The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the air bag
sensors, the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module. For more information
on the air bag system, see Air Bag Systems on
page 1-42.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
3-26
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system is
ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
3-27
Air Bag Off Light
When you turn the passenger’s frontal air bag off, the
air bag off light, located on the roof panel above
the rearview mirror, will come on and stay on to remind
you that the air bag has been turned off. This light
will go off when you turn the passenger’s frontal air bag
back on again. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-51
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-28
{CAUTION:
If the passenger’s frontal air bag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group
identified by the national government, that
person will not have the extra protection of a
frontal air bag. In a crash, the air bag would
not be able to inflate and help protect the
person sitting there. Do not turn off the
passenger’s frontal air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See Air Bag Off
Switch on page 1-51 for more on this,
including important safety information.
Charging System Light
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the passenger’s
frontal air bag, it means that something may
be wrong with the air bag system. The
passenger’s frontal air bag could inflate even
though the switch is off. If this ever happens,
do not let anyone whom the national
government has identified as a member of a
passenger air bag risk group sit in the
passenger’s position (for example, do not
secure a rear-facing child restraint in your
vehicle) until you have your vehicle serviced.
See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-51.
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-29
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 2-18 for more information. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
3-30
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on for
several seconds. That’s
normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but
you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock
brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-30.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
If the TC (traction control)
warning light comes on
and stays on, there may be
a problem with the
traction control system.
The TC (traction control) warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition to ON. If it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
If the Traction Control System (TCS) is on and you drive
faster than 100 mph (161 km/h), the system will turn
off and the TC warning light will come on. The TCS will
turn back on and the TC warning light will go out
once the vehicle speed falls below 90 mph (145 km/h).
If the TC (traction control) warning light stays on or
comes on while you are driving, pull off the road as soon
as possible and stop carefully. Try resetting the
system by turning the ignition off then back on. If the
light still stays on or comes back on again while you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. Have the traction
control system inspected as soon as possible.
3-31
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer is near 260 °F (125 °C), the engine is
too hot.
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If
you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26 for more
information.
3-32
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-33
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
Avoiding hard accelerations.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
3-34
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-35
Oil Pressure Gage
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
3-36
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused
by a low oil level or other oil-related problems. See your
dealer for service immediately.
Change Engine Oil Light
This light is displayed
when the engine oil needs
to be changed.
Once the engine oil has been changed, the light must
be reset. Until it is reset, the light will be displayed when
the engine is on. For more information on resetting
the system, see “When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil
Life System)” under Engine Oil on page 5-13. See
also Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
Security Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key to START. The
light will stay on until the
engine starts.
If the light flashes, the Passlock® system has entered a
tamper mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®
on page 2-13.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and
stays on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your dealer.
Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-11 for
additional information regarding the security light.
3-37
Cruise Control Light
This symbol appears on
your instrument panel
whenever you set
your cruise control. See
“Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-5.
Reduced Engine Power Light
This light is displayed
when a noticeable
reduction in the vehicle’s
performance may occur.
The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when
the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. The performance may
be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle. If
this light stays on, see your dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
This light may also come on if there is a problem with
the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) system. If this
happens, take the vehicle in for service as soon as
possible.
3-38
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
Check Gages Warning Light
The Check Gages light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
If the light comes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your coolant temperature and engine oil
pressure gages to see if they are in the warning zones.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-32
and Oil Pressure Gage on page 3-36.
When the fuel level is low in your vehicle, the check
gages light will come on and a chime will sound. You will
also see a FUEL LEVEL LOW message on the DIC.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-48
for more information.
3-39
Fuel Gage
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you about
how much fuel you have remaining.
A chime will sound and the check gages warning light
will come on when your fuel level is low. FUEL
LEVEL LOW will appear on the DIC display. See Check
Gages Warning Light on page 3-39, “Fuel Range”
under DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-44, and
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-48 for
more information.
3-40
Auxiliary Gage Package
Voltmeter Gage
This gage (A) is located on
the left side of the gage
package.
When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in
RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.
A. Voltmeter Gage
B. Instantaneous Fuel Consumption Gage
C. Transmission Temperature Gage
When the ignition is on and the engine is running, the
gage shows the condition of the charging system.
Readings between the low and high warning zones
indicate the normal operating range.
Your vehicle may have an auxiliary gage package
located at the front of the center console.
3-41
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
Instantaneous Fuel Consumption Gage
This gage (B) is located in
the center of the gage
package.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive while the gage
is in the warning zone, turn off all unnecessary
accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
The instantaneous fuel consumption gage shows the
rate of fuel that is being used in gallons per hour (gph).
3-42
Transmission Temperature Gage
This gage (C) is located on
the right side of the gage
package.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the
temperature of the transmission fluid. The normal
operating range is from 100°F (38°C) to about
265°F (130°C).
Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to do so.
Set the parking brake, place the transmission in
PARK (P) and allow the engine to idle until the
transmission temperature falls below 260°F (127°C).
If the transmission continues to operate above 260°F
(127°C), see your dealer for service or contact GM
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-6.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above normal
operating range, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your
vehicle while the transmission temperature gage
reading is above normal. See your dealer for service.
At approximately 265°F (130°C), the transmission will
enter a transmission protection mode. When the
transmission enters the protection mode, you may notice
a change in the transmission shifting patterns. The
transmission will return to normal shifting patterns
when the transmission fluid temperature falls below
260°F (127°C).
3-43
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Engine overheating
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. It is also used
to display driver personalization features and
warning/status messages. The DIC display is located on
the instrument panel cluster. The DIC buttons are
located on the steering wheel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay the DIC will display the current driver and the
information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Be sure to take any message that
appears on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the message will only make the message
disappear, not correct the problem.
DIC Controls and Displays
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four buttons located on the steering wheel.
The button functions are listed in the following pages.
3-44
A.
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to
display the odometer, trip odometer, and the timer.
B.
. (Fuel Information): Press this button to
display the current fuel and engine oil information.
C.
y (Personalization): Press this button to
access the vehicle personalization menu and
customize the personalization settings on your
vehicle.
D.
r (Select): Press this button to reset certain
DIC functions, acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC, and set your
personalization settings.
3-45
Trip Information
Timer
3 (Trip Information):
The DIC can be used as a stopwatch. Press the trip
information button until TIMER is displayed. Press the
select button to start the timer. The display will show
the amount of time that has passed since the timer was
last reset (not including time the ignition is off). Time
will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is on,
even if another display is being shown on the DIC.
The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will
roll back to zero.
Press this button to scroll
through the odometer, TRIP A, TRIP B, and TIMER.
Odometer
Press the trip information button until the odometer
appears on the display. This shows the total distance
the vehicle has been driven in either miles or kilometers.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip information button until TRIP A or TRIP B
is displayed. This shows the current distance traveled
since the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles
or kilometers. Both odometers can be used at the
same time.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing and holding the select button while the desired
trip odometer is displayed.
Fuel Information
3-46
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
. (Fuel Information):
Press this button to scroll
through the range, average fuel economy, instant fuel
economy and engine oil life.
Fuel Range
Instant Fuel Economy
Press the fuel information button until RANGE appears
to display the remaining distance you can drive
without refueling. It’s based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank. The display will show
FUEL LEVEL LOW if the fuel level is low and a chime
will sound. The check gages warning light on the
instrument panel cluster will also be illuminated.
See Check Gages Warning Light on page 3-39 for
more information.
Press the fuel information button until INST. ECON
appears in the display. Instant fuel economy is
how many miles per gallon your vehicle is at the
particular moment in time. The instant fuel economy
cannot be reset.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy
Press the fuel information button until AVG. ECON
appears in the display. Average fuel economy is how
many miles per gallon your vehicle is getting based on
current and past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button while AVG. ECON is
displayed to reset the average fuel economy. Average
fuel economy will then be calculated starting from
that point. If the average fuel economy is not reset,
it will be continually updated each time you drive.
Engine Oil Life
Press the fuel information button until ENGINE OIL LIFE
appears in the display. The GM Oil Life System™
shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life.
It will show 100% when the system is reset after an
oil change. It will alert you to change your oil on
a schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, press and hold the
select button while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed.
The engine oil life reading in the DIC does not replace
the need to maintain your vehicle as recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13, Change Engine Oil Light on page 3-37, and
Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
3-47
Personalization
DIC Warnings and Messages
y (Personalization):
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another. Some messages may not require immediate
action but you should press the select button to
acknowledge that you received the message and clear it
from the display. Some messages cannot be cleared
from the display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be removed
from the DIC display. The following are the possible
messages that can be displayed and some information
about them.
Press this button to access the
vehicle personalization menu and customize the
personalization settings on your vehicle. See DIC
Vehicle Personalization on page 3-55 for more
information.
Select
r (Select): Press this button to reset certain
DIC functions, acknowledge DIC warning messages and
clear them from the DIC, and set your personalization
settings.
Battery Not Charging
If the battery is not charging during operation, this
message will appear on the DIC. The charging system
light may also be displayed on the instrument panel
cluster. See Charging System Light on page 3-29
for more information. Driving your vehicle when the
battery is not charging properly can drain the battery.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible.
Press the select button to acknowledge this message
and clear it from the DIC display.
3-48
Battery Voltage Too High
Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid
This message will be displayed when the battery
voltage is higher than normal and you try to raise or
lower the convertible top. The charging system light may
also be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.
See Charging System Light on page 3-29 for more
information. Press the select button to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display.
If your transmission fluid in your vehicle needs to be
changed, this message will appear on the DIC.
See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-20 and
Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more
information.
Battery Voltage Too Low
If the oil level in the vehicle is low this message will
appear on the DIC. Check the oil level and add oil as
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more
information. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display.
This message will be displayed when the battery
voltage is lower than normal and you try to raise or
lower the convertible top. The charging system light may
also be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.
See Charging System Light on page 3-29 for more
information. Press the select button to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display.
Cargo Cover Ajar
This message will be displayed when trying to open or
close the convertible top while the cargo cover is
open. Make sure the cargo cover is fully closed before
trying to open or close the convertible top. This
message will clear itself from the DIC once the cargo
cover is closed.
Check Oil Level
Depress Brake
This message will be displayed on the DIC when you try
to raise or lower the convertible top without first
pressing the brake pedal. The brake pedal must be
pressed in order to operate the convertible top.
See Convertible Top on page 2-45 for more information.
Pressing the brake pedal will clear the message, or
you can press the select button to acknowledge
and clear the message from the DIC display.
3-49
Driver Door Ajar
Engine Overheated Stop Engine
This message will be displayed on the DIC when the
driver’s door was not closed completely. A chime
will sound. Stop the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Fully closing the
driver’s door will clear this message from the display, or
you can press the select button to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Hot Idle Engine
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
If the cooling system temperature becomes too hot, this
message will appear in the DIC and you will hear a
chime. Stop the vehicle and let the engine idle in
PARK (P) to allow the coolant to reach a safe
temperature. You may need to add more coolant to your
vehicle before driving again. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23 and Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
on page 3-32 for more information. This message will
clear from the DIC display when the coolant temperature
drops to a safe operating temperature.
3-50
If your engine is overheated, this message will be
displayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible and do not drive it until the engine cools down.
You may need to add more coolant to your vehicle
before driving again. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-26 and Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on
page 3-32 for more information. This message will clear
from the DIC display when the coolant temperature
drops to a safe operating temperature.
Flip Hall Switch Fault
This message will be displayed on the DIC when trying
to raise or lower the convertible top and there is a
fault with this switch. If the message persists, see your
dealer for service.
Fuel Level Low
If the fuel level is low in the vehicle’s gas tank this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear a
chime. You will also see the check gages warning light
on the instrument panel cluster. See Check Gages
Warning Light on page 3-39 for more information. Refuel
as soon as possible. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7
and Fuel Gage on page 3-40 for more information.
Press the select button to acknowledge and clear the
message from the display.
Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Hdr (Header) Latch Switch Fault
This message will be displayed on the DIC when trying
to raise or lower the convertible top and there is a
fault with this switch. If the message persists, see your
dealer for service.
Manually Open Tonneau
This message will be displayed on the DIC when trying
to raise or lower the convertible top while the
convertible top and roof tonneau are where the system
cannot verify their position. The roof system may
need to be restored manually to a stable position by
fully opening the roof tonneau and boot cover panel. See
Convertible Top on page 2-45 for more information.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
If the oil pressure is low in your vehicle, this message
will be displayed on the DIC. Stop the vehicle as
soon as possible and do not drive it until the cause of
the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check your oil
as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.
See Engine Oil on page 5-13 and Oil Pressure Gage on
page 3-36 for more information.
3-51
Passenger Door Ajar
Rfa X Battery Low
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop the vehicle, check the door for obstacles, and close
the door again. Fully closing the passenger’s door will
clear this message from the display, or you can
press the select button to acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display.
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low, this
message will appear on the DIC. The battery needs
to be replaced in the transmitter. Press the select button
to acknowledge this message and clear it from the
DIC display. See “Battery Replacement” under Remote
Keyless Entry System Operation on page 2-4 for
battery replacement instructions.
Put Vehicle in Park
Roof Ajar
This message will be displayed on the DIC when
attempting to release the cargo cover when the vehicle
is not in PARK (P). The vehicle must stopped and
the transmission placed in PARK (P) to release the
cargo cover. See Cargo Cover on page 2-31 for more
information.
This message will be displayed on the DIC when trying
to release the cargo cover and the convertible top is
not fully open or closed. Make sure your convertible top
is in the full-closed or full-open position before trying
to release your cargo cover. See Convertible Top
on page 2-45 and Cargo Cover on page 2-31 for more
information. This message will clear once the
convertible top is open or closed, or you can press the
select button to acknowledge the message and clear
it from the DIC display.
Reduce Speed
This message will be displayed on the DIC when trying
to raise or lower the convertible top while the vehicle
is in motion. Stop the vehicle and continue pressing the
brake pedal before trying to raise or lower the top
again. See Convertible Top on page 2-45 for more
information. The message will clear from the display
once the vehicle is stopped, or you can press the select
button to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
3-52
Roof Cycle Timeout
Service Air Bag
This message will be displayed on the DIC when the
convertible top has not completed its movement
from one position to another within the programmed
time limit.
If there is a problem with the air bag system this
message will be displayed on the DIC. The air bag
readiness light may also be displayed on the instrument
panel cluster. See your dealer for service. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the display. See Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 1-55 and Air Bag Readiness Light
on page 3-26 for more information.
Notice: If you operate the convertible top switch
continuously while the ignition is in ACCESSORY,
the battery will drain and you might not be able
to start your vehicle. Do not use the convertible top
switch for extended periods of time when the
ignition is in ACCESSORY.
When this message appears, the convertible top will
stop moving. Release the convertible top switch
and make sure there is nothing blocking the path of the
top. If the path is clear, turn the ignition off and on
again. Then press the convertible top switch again. See
Convertible Top on page 2-45 for more information.
Roof Hall Switch Fault
This message will be displayed on the DIC when trying
to raise or lower the convertible top and there is a
fault with this switch. If the message persists, see your
dealer for service.
Service Brake System
If a problem occurs with the brake system this message
will appear on the DIC. The brake system warning
light and the anti-lock brake system warning light may
also be displayed on the instrument panel cluster.
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-30 and
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on page 3-31 for
more information. If this message appears, stop as
soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display. If
the message is still displayed, or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service. See
Brakes on page 5-33 for more information. Press the
select button to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the display.
3-53
Stop Vehicle
Traction Active
This message will be displayed when attempting to
release the cargo cover while the vehicle is in motion.
The vehicle must stopped and the transmission
placed in PARK (P) to release the cargo cover. See
Cargo Cover on page 2-31 for more information.
This message, along with the light on the Traction
Control System (TCS) warning light on the instrument
panel cluster, will be displayed when the TCS system is
active. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 and Traction
Control System (TCS) Warning Light on page 3-31 for
more information.
Tlat (Tonneau Latch) Hall Switch Fault
This message will be displayed when trying to raise
or lower the convertible top and there is a problem with
this switch. If the message persists, see your dealer
for service.
Tonn (Tonneau) Hall Switch Fault
This message will be displayed when trying to raise or
lower the convertible top and there is a fault with
this switch. If the message persists, see your dealer for
service.
Tonn (Tonneau) Latd (Latched) Switch
Fault
This message will be displayed when trying to raise or
lower the convertible top and there is a fault with
this switch. If the message persists, see your dealer for
service.
3-54
Trans (Transmission) Hot Idle
If the transmission fluid in the vehicle becomes too hot,
this message will appear on the DIC. Stop the vehicle
and let it idle to allow the transmission fluid to cool. This
message will clear when the fluid temperature reaches
a safe level. See Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 5-20 and if your vehicle is equipped with
the auxiliary gage package, see “Transmission
Temperature Gage” under Auxiliary Gage Package on
page 3-41 for more information.
Turn Signal On
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position. Press the select button to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the display. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5 for more
information.
Unknown Speed
This message will be displayed when trying to raise or
lower the convertible top and the roof controller
cannot communicate with the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). See your dealer for service.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has a personalization feature that allows
you to program certain features to a preferred setting for
up to two drivers. The number of programmable
features varies depending upon which model of the
vehicle you purchased. Once the features are
programmed, the saved settings are recalled by pressing
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, 1 or 2, or by pressing the appropriate
memory button, 1 or 2, located on the outboard side of
the driver’s seat. See Memory Seat on page 2-52
for more information.
The following is a list of available programmable
options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AUTOMATIC LOCKING
AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING
REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK
REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK
HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT
PERIMETER LIGHTING
SEAT POSITION RECALL (If equipped)
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DISPLAY UNITS (U.S./MET)
y (Personalization):
Press this button located on the
steering wheel to access the vehicle personalization
menu and customize the personalization settings
on your vehicle.
3-55
Automatic Locking
Automatic Unlocking
This feature allows you to choose how the vehicle’s
doors are locked. Press the personalization button until
AUTOMATIC LOCKING appears in the display. To
access the modes for AUTOMATIC LOCKING, press
the select button. Once AUTOMATIC LOCKING is
selected, press the select button to scroll through the
following modes:
This feature allows you to choose how the vehicle’s
doors are unlocked. Press the personalization button
until AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING appears in the display.
To access the modes for AUTOMATIC UNLOCKING,
press the select button. Once AUTOMATIC
UNLOCKING is selected, press the select button to
scroll through the following modes:
Mode 1: LOCK DOORS OUT OF PARK
Mode 1: UNLOCK ALL IN PARK
Mode 2: LOCK DOORS WITH SPEED
Mode 2: UNLOCK ALL AT KEY OUT
If you choose Mode 1, the doors will lock when the
vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
Mode 3: UNLOCK DRIVER IN PARK
If you choose Mode 2, the doors will lock when the
vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three
seconds.
Scroll through the list of modes. When the mode you
want is displayed on the DIC, press personalization
button to set your choice, return to the personalization
menu, and advance to the next programmable feature.
For more information on automatic door locks see
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-8.
3-56
Mode 4: UNLOCK DOORS MANUALLY
If you choose Mode 1, all of the doors will unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
If you choose Mode 2, all of the doors will unlock when
the key is taken out of the ignition.
If you choose Mode 3, the driver’s door ill be unlocked
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
If you choose Mode 4, the doors will not be unlocked
automatically.
Scroll through the list of modes. When the mode you
want is displayed on the DIC, press personalization
button to set your choice, return to the personalization
menu, and advance to the next programmable feature.
For more information on automatic door locks see
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-8.
Remote Lock Feedback
This feature allows you to choose whether or not the
horn honks and the parking lamps flash when you lock
the vehicle with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press the personalization button until REMOTE
LOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display. To access
the modes for REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK, press
the select button. Once REMOTE LOCK FEEDBACK is
selected, press the select button to scroll through the
following modes:
Mode 1: LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH
Mode 2: LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF
Mode 3: LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN
Mode 4: LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS
If you choose Mode 1, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter and the horn will chirp the second time
you press the lock button.
If you choose Mode 4, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the lock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Scroll through the list of modes. When the mode you
want is displayed on the DIC, press personalization
button to set your choice, return to the personalization
menu, and advance to the next programmable feature.
Remote Unlock Feedback
This feature allows you to choose whether or not the
parking lamps flash and the horn honks when you
unlock the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. Press the personalization button until
REMOTE UNLOCK FEEDBACK appears in the display.
To access the modes for REMOTE UNLOCK
FEEDBACK, press the select button. Once REMOTE
UNLOCK FEEDBACK is selected, press the select
button to scroll through the following modes:
Mode 1: UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH
Mode 2: UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF
If you choose Mode 2, there will be no feedback when
locking the vehicle.
Mode 3: UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN
If you choose Mode 3, the horn will chirp the second
time you press the button with the lock symbol on
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Mode 4: UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS
3-57
If you choose Mode 1, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the unlock symbol on
the remote keyless entry transmitter. The horn will chirp
the second time you press the unlock button.
If you choose Mode 2, there will be no feedback when
unlocking the vehicle.
If you choose Mode 3, the horn will chirp the second
time you press the button with the unlock symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Headlamps on at Exit
This feature allows you to set the amount of time you
want the headlamps to remain on after you exit the
vehicle. Press the personalization button until
HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT appears in the display. To
access the modes for HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT, press
the select button. Once HEADLAMPS ON AT EXIT is
selected, press the select button to scroll through
the following modes:
If you choose Mode 4, the parking lamps will flash each
time you press the button with the unlock symbol on
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Mode 1: HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC
Scroll through the list of modes. When the mode you
want is displayed on the DIC, press personalization
button to set your choice, return to the personalization
menu, and advance to the next programmable feature.
Mode 3: HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
Mode 2: HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
Mode 4: HEADLAMP DELAY: 60 SEC
Mode 5: HEADLAMP DELAY: 120 SEC
Mode 6: HEADLAMP DELAY: 180 SEC
Mode 7: HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
If you choose Mode 7, the headlamps will turn off as
soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Scroll through the list of modes. When the mode you
want is displayed on the DIC, press personalization
button to set your choice, return to the personalization
menu, and advance to the next programmable feature.
3-58
Perimeter Lighting
Seat Position Recall
This feature allows you to choose whether or not certain
exterior lamps turn on when the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed. Press
the personalization button until PERIMETER LIGHTING
appears in the display. To access the modes for
PERIMETER LIGHTING, press the select button. Once
PERIMETER LIGHTING is selected, press the select
button to scroll through the following modes:
This feature allows you to choose how any previously
programmed seat position is recalled. Press the
personalization button until SEAT POSITION RECALL
appears in the display. To access the modes for
SEAT POSITION RECALL, press the select button.
Once SEAT POSITION RECALL is selected, press the
select button to scroll through the following modes:
Mode 1: PERIMETER LIGHTING ON
Mode 2: SEAT POSITION RECALL AT KEY IN
Mode 2: PERIMETER LIGHTING OFF
Mode 3: SEAT POSITION RECALL ON REMOTE
If you choose Mode 1, the memory seat position you
saved will only be recalled when the memory
button 1 or 2 is pressed.
If you choose Mode 2, the memory seat position you
saved will be recalled when you put the key in the
ignition.
If you choose Mode 3, the memory seat position you
saved will be recalled when you unlock the vehicle with
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Scroll through the list of modes. When the mode you
want is displayed on the DIC, press personalization
button to set your choice, return to the personalization
menu, and advance to the next programmable
feature. See Memory Seat on page 2-52 for more
information.
If you choose Mode 1, the headlamps and back-up
lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if it is dark enough
outside, when you unlock the vehicle with the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
Scroll through the list of modes. When the mode you
want is displayed on the DIC, press personalization
button to set your choice, return to the personalization
menu, and advance to the next programmable feature.
Mode 1: SEAT POSITION RECALL OFF
3-59
Display Language
Display Units (U.S./MET)
This feature allows you to choose the language in which
the DIC information will be displayed. Press the select
button until DISPLAY LANGUAGE appears on the
DIC. Once DISPLAY LANGUAGE is selected, press the
select button to scroll through the following modes:
The feature allows you to choose the measurement
units. Press the personalization button until DISPLAY
UNITS appears in the display. To access the modes for
DISPLAY UNITS, press the select button. Once
DISPLAY UNITS is selected, press the select button to
scroll through the following modes:
Mode 1: ENGLISH
Mode 2: FRANCAIS (French)
Mode 3: ESPANOL (Spanish)
When the language you desire is displayed on the DIC,
press personalization button to set your choice,
return to the personalization menu, and advance to the
next programmable feature.
If you accidentally choose a language that you don’t
want, press and hold the personalization button and the
trip information button at the same time. The DIC will
begin scrolling through the languages in their particular
language. English will be in English, French will be
in French and so on. When you see the language that
you would like, release both buttons. The DIC will
then display the information in the language you chose.
3-60
Mode 1: UNITS: U.S. (ENGLISH)
Mode 2: UNITS: METRIC (km/L)
Mode 3: UNITS: METRIC (L/100km)
If you choose Mode 1, all information will be displayed
in English units.
If you choose Mode 2 or 3, all information will be
displayed in metric units.
Scroll through the list of modes. When the mode you
want is displayed on the DIC, press personalization
button to set your choice, return to the personalization
menu, and advance to the next programmable feature.
Audio System(s)
Setting the Time
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR to
represent hours and an M or MN to represent minutes.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. AM or PM will appear on
the display for morning or evening hours. Press and
hold the minute button until the correct minute appears
on the display. The time can be set with the ignition
on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time for
two seconds until UPDATED and the clock symbol
appear on the display. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
3-61
Radio with CD
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation as vehicle speed increases.
To turn automatic volume off, press this button until
AVOL OFF appears on the display.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
3-62
For RDS, press this knob to change what appears on
the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
To change the default on the display, press this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM), by performing the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
q SEEK r: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
q SCAN r: Press and hold either arrow for
more than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the
display and you will hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on
the display and you will hear two beeps. The radio will
go to the first preset station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next preset station. Press either arrow
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning.
3. Tune in the desired station.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton, the
station you set will return and the equalization
that you selected will be automatically stored for
that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-63
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display, you will hear a beep, and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,
returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
3-64
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and hold
it until the radio produces one beep. The balance and
fade will be adjusted to the middle position and the
display will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on
the display, you will hear a beep, and the display level
will be adjusted to the middle position.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear
on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the SEEK
TYPE button or either SEEK arrow to take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE
button once. If the PTY is not displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE LIST knob to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
3-65
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within
a PTY by performing the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear
on the display.
Setting Preset PTYs
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning
the stations in the PTY.
2. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear
on the display.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
3. Turn the P-TYPE LIST knob to select a PTY.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
3-66
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn
off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message. The
message may display the artist, song title, call in phone
numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will
appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, the information
symbol will disappear from the display until another
new message is received. The old message can
be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view an old message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
3-67
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop and TRAF will be displayed. When a traffic
announcement comes on the tuned radio station you
will hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will
appear on the display.
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF
button to turn off the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a
CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Your audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display it means that your
radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and must be returned to the dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
Theftlock® system has locked up. Your vehicle must be
returned to the dealer for service.
3-68
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. The
CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the eject
button or the DISP knob.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track if it has been playing for
more than eight seconds. TRACK and the track number
will appear on the display. If you hold this pushbutton
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it
for more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release the pushbutton to
play the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release the pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
q SEEK r:
Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If you
hold either arrow or press it more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
q SCAN r: To scan the CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
3-69
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change the default on
the display (track or elapsed time), press the knob until
you see the display you want, then hold the knob for
two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and the
selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop a CD when it is
playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing. Eject
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning the
CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-70
Radio with Six-Disc CD
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation as vehicle speed increases.
To turn automatic volume off, press this button until
AVOL OFF appears on the display.
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
Playing the Radio
If your vehicle is equipped with Bose the system will
have AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.
AudioPilot monitors the level of noise in the vehicle and
automatically increases or decreases the level of the
audio to keep your audio above the noise.
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
3-71
To use this feature set the volume at the desires level.
Press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL appears on
the display. This feature works best at lower volume
settings where background noise may be louder than the
audio. At high volume settings, where the audio is
much louder than the background noise, there will be no
change in the audio level. To turn automatic volume
off, press the AUTO VOL button until AVOL OFF
appears on the display.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. Press
this knob with the ignition off to display the time.
To change the default on the display, press the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, and AM. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrow
for two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display and you will hear a double
beep. The radio will go to a preset station stored on
your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-72
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations (six FM1,
six FM2, and six AM) by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you set will return and the equalization that you
selected will be automatically stored for that
pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID, or
TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase
or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID, or TREB and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to zero.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO EQ
button until CUSTOM appears on the display. Then you
will be able to manually adjust the bass, midrange,
and treble using the AUDIO knob.
If your vehicle is equipped with Bose®, your audio
system allows you to choose from three different
equalization settings: normal, driver, and spacious.
These settings can be used while listening to the radio
or the CD player.
3-73
NORMAL: This setting provides the best overall vehicle
sound quality for all seating locations.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
DRIVER: This setting gives the driver the best sound
quality.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until BAL
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the left or the right speakers.
SPACIOUS: This setting makes the listening space
seem larger.
The radio can save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
The Bose system will automatically adjust the
equalization to compensate for the change in acoustics
when the convertible top is down. You will hear a
momentary mute when the equalization switches just at
the end of the top down cycle and just at the beginning
of the top up cycle.
3-74
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on
the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold the
AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and will
adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press either
SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then to
go to another station.
5. Press the P-TYPE button to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
3-75
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You
may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a CD, the last selected RDS station will
interrupt play if that selected program type format
is broadcast.
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
3-76
AM FM (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold AM FM for two seconds. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold AM FM
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
Setting Preset PTYs
RDS Messages
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2) by
performing the following steps:
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn
off alert announcements.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
press that numbered pushbutton, the PTY you
set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will
appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, INFO will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received. The old message can be displayed by
pressing the INFO button. You can view an old message
until a new message is received or a different station
is tuned to.
3-77
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, the
radio will stop and brackets will be displayed around
TRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on
the tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is
found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you
can then press the TRAF button to remove the
brackets or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to
go to a station that supports traffic announcements.
If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the
display.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a
CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements and the brackets are displayed.
3-78
Playing a CD
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD CD Z: Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the CD player. This CD player will
hold up to six CDs.
The CD will begin to play automatically. As each new
track starts to play, the track number will appear on the
display.
To insert one CD, do the following:
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button.
2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. If you select an equalization setting for your
CD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns
green you can load another CD. The CD player
takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load more
than six.
3-79
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading
CDs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of the
LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function. The
radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. If more than one CD has been loaded,
a number for each CD will appear on the display. If you
select an equalization setting for your CD, it will be
activated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX.
Then press the numbered pushbutton that corresponds
to the CD you want to play. A small bar will appear
under the CD number that is playing, and the track
number will appear.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject side of this
button to eject a single CD or multiple CDs. To eject
the CD that is currently playing, press and release this
button. To eject multiple CDs, press and hold this
button for two seconds. You will hear a beep and the
light will flash to let you know when a CD is being
ejected.
REMOVE CD will appear on the display. You can now
remove the CD. If the CD is not removed, after
25 seconds, the CD will be automatically pulled back
into the receiver. If you try to push the CD back into the
receiver, before the 25 second time period is complete,
the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject
the CD several times before stopping.
3-80
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
receivers 25-second eject timer will reset at each press
of eject, which will cause the receiver to not eject
the CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
or an entire CD. To use repeat, do the following:
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove the
CD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob off
and then on again. This will clear the CD-sensing feature
and enable CDs to be loaded into the player again.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
{ REV (Reverse):
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
Press and hold this button
to reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
3-81
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be automatically set
whenever you play a CD. For more information on
AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
this section.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track and elapsed time), press the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display will
now be the default.
sSEEK t: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you
hold either arrow or press it more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD(s) is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain in
the radio for future listening.
sSCAN t: To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
currently selected CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each
CD loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop
scanning.
3-82
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow button to locate the track that you want
to save. The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save the
track into memory. When SONG LIST is pressed a
beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing SONG LIST, two beeps will
sound to confirm that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save
more than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button. One
beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in the
order that they were saved.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
3-83
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the following
steps:
To delete the entire song list, perform the following
steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed
by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will
be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song
list has been deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, a beep
will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.
3-84
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
CD Messages
Theft-Deterrent Feature
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be for one of the following reasons:
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-85
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the following:
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
to fast forward or reverse.
Q u R (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
3-86
Radio Reception
Care of Your CD Player
AM
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
Integrated Windshield Antenna
The antenna in your vehicle is a very thin, metal layer in
the windshield. The outline of the antenna can be seen
near the edges of the windshield. The connector is at the
top of the windshield, where the headliner ends.
If difficulty with remote transmitters is experienced, such
as a garage door opener, try pointing the device
through the very top of the windshield.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-87
✍ NOTES
3-88
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Steering ......................................................4-11
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13
Passing .......................................................4-13
Loss of Control .............................................4-15
Driving at Night ............................................4-16
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17
City Driving ..................................................4-20
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-23
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-24
Winter Driving ..............................................4-26
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...4-31
Towing ..........................................................4-32
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-32
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-32
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-32
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-38
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-39
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-6.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking. Please do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering and the accelerator. All three systems have
to do their work at the places where the tires meet
the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-31.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS) that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system reduces engine power and may also upshift
the transmission to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control”
in Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.
The Traction Control System operates in all transmission
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transmission only as high as the shift lever position
you’ve chosen, so you should use the lower gears only
when necessary. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-16.
4-9
When the system is on,
this warning light will come
on to let you know if
there’s a problem.
To turn the system on or
off press the button
located on your center
console switchbank. See
Center Console
Switchbank on page 3-17
for more information.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If the Traction Control System (TCS) is on and you drive
faster than 100 mph (161 km/h), the system will turn
off and the TC warning light will come on. The TCS will
turn back on and the TC warning light will go out
once the vehicle speed falls below 90 mph (145 km/h).
See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Light
on page 3-31.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the Traction Control
System on. But you can turn the system off if you
ever need to. You should turn the system off if your
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and
rocking the vehicle is required. See “Rocking Your
Vehicle” in If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
on page 4-31.
4-10
When you turn the system off, the Traction Control
System warning light will come on and stay on. If the
Traction Control System is limiting wheel spin when you
press the button to turn the system off, the warning
light will come on and the system will turn off right away.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The Traction Control System
warning light should go off.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface
makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path
when you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction,
inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do their
work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden
acceleration can demand too much of those places. You
can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
4-11
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-13
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space
if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep
back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes
up for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-14
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
(Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your TCS system is off, then
an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration
or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-15
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-16
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-17
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-18
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water crossing,
your vehicle can be carried away. As little as
six inches of flowing water can carry away a
smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other
vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise be very
cautious about trying to drive through flowing
water.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
4-19
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
City Driving
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-51.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-21
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
4-22
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-23
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway
hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel?
Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or
whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-24
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the hill
better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
4-25
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
Winter Driving
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-51.
4-26
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
4-27
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
4-28
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you
will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until
you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things
to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you
have been stopped by the snow.
4-29
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-30
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck, but
you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-65.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Turn your
traction control system off; see Traction Control System
(TCS) on page 4-9. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning
your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your
vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries,
you may need to be towed out. If you do need to
be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
4-31
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
For information about recreational vehicle towing, see
the following entry.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be
towed, it should be placed on a platform trailer.
4-32
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label is attached to
the center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. Vehicles
without a center pillar will have the Tire and Loading
Information label attached to the driver’s door edge.
This label lists the number of people that can be in your
vehicle and the total weight it can carry. This weight
is called the vehicle capacity weight.
The Tire and Loading Information label also tells you
the size and recommended inflation pressure for
the original equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-51
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
U.S. shown, Canada similar
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
If your vehicle does not have the Tire and Loading
Information label, the Certification/Tire label shows
the tire size and recommended inflation pressures
needed to obtain the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See
“Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
4-33
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
4-34
Example 1
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1=
Total
400 lbs (181 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) x 1=
150 lbs (68 kg)
C
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
Example 2
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
B
C
Loading Your Vehicle
Total
Item
Description
Total
400 lbs (181 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
400 lbs (181 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) x 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant
Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) x 2 =
400 lbs (181 kg)
Available Cargo
Weight =
100 lbs (45 kg)
C
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading label for specific
information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed your
vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-35
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your rear axle, you need to go to a weigh station
and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both
sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for the rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out and load toward the front of the pickup box.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note the Certification/Tire
label on your truck or consult your dealer for additional
details.
U.S. Shown, Canada Similar
The Certification/Tire label is found on the driver’s door
edge, below the door latch. The label shows the size
of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed
to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.
This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, if
pulling a trailer.
4-36
{CAUTION:
In the case of a sudden stop or collision,
things carried in the bed of your truck could
shift forward and come into the passenger
area, injuring you and others. If you put things
in the bed of your truck, you should make sure
they are properly secured.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the rear area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
above the tops of the seats inside the
vehicle or in the cargo area when the
convertible top is lowered.
• If you carry tall objects in the cargo area,
secure them properly and have the
convertible top fastened in the raised
position.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-37
Payload
Trailer Recommendations
This is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle can
carry. Be sure to include the weight of the occupants
as part of your load. If you added any accessories
or equipment after your vehicle left the factory,
remember to subtract the weight of these things from
the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.
You must subtract your hitch load from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR) for your vehicle. The CWR is the
maximum weight of the load your vehicle can carry.
The CWR does not include the weight of the people
inside, but you can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each
seating position. The total cargo load must not be
more than the vehicle’s CWR. Make sure to weigh your
vehicle with your trailer attached, so that you won’t
go over the GVWR or the GAWR.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you carry inside your
vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy
and install the new equipment.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
4-38
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-39
later in this section.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your
vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
4-39
If You Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
4-40
• Tow the trailer in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a
lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• Weight of the trailer
• Weight of the trailer tongue
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming the
driver and one passenger are in the tow vehicle and it
has all the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo
in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the
maximum trailer weight. The weight of the trailer tongue
also affects the maximum trailer weight. See “Weight
of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section.
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle
should not be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your vehicle is a two-wheel drive vehicle. The axle
ratio is 3.73, the maximum trailer weight is
2,500 lbs. (1 134 kg) and the Gross Combination
Weight Rating (GCWR) is 8,000 lbs. (3 629 kg).
4-41
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum of 250 lbs (113 kg) with the equipped hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Only use the equipped hitch that comes
with your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately to see if the weights
are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the
trailer.
4-42
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32. Then be
sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
Your vehicle is compatible only with the following
trailering hitch. To order this hitch, see your dealer.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Centering Device
Handwheel
Lock
Ball Rod
E. Ball (purchased
separately)
F. Chain Loop
4-43
Installing the Ball Rod
To install the ball rod do the following:
2. Be sure the unit is unlocked before pretensioning.
Unlock using the key.
1. Remove the cover of the housing located behind
the license plate area by pushing in the tabs and
pulling downward.
4-44
Then pretension the ball rod by pulling out the
handwheel and turning it counterclockwise. When
the ball is pretensioned, it means:
• The red area of the handwheel should be
opposite the white marking on the ball rod.
• The key cannot be withdrawn.
• The ball rod can only be installed in this position.
If the key is inserted and the lock is open,
tighten the handwheel slightly and turn clockwise
as far as the stop. Insert the ball rod as far
into the housing as it will go. When this happens,
you will hear the lock engage.
3. Check that the ball rod is tight by doing the
following:
• Close the lock, withdraw the key, and install the
lock cover securely.
• The green area on the handwheel should be
opposite the white dot on the ball rod.
• Move the hitch back and forth to ensure it is
properly secured.
If you cannot complete all of the above checks, repeat
the assembly procedure.
4-45
Removing the Ball Rod
To remove the ball rod do the following:
2. Hold the ball rod tight with one hand, tighten the
handwheel slightly and turn it clockwise as far as
it will go.
1. Open the lock cover on the handwheel and unlock
with the key.
4-46
3. Pull the ball rod down and off. Store the ball rod for
future use.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
4. Reinstall the housing cover.
4-47
Trailer Brakes
Driving with a Trailer
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes—and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch, parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-48
Passing
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher (included
in the optional trailering package).
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-49
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
Under normal conditions, use DRIVE (D) to tow a trailer.
You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3)
or, if necessary, a lower gear if the transmission shifts
too often under heavy loads or hilly conditions.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the transmission in PARK (P) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. If you do get the overheat
warning, see Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet. Then turn your wheels into the
curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Release the regular brakes.
4-50
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt,
cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual. If you’re trailering, it’s a
good idea to review these sections before you start
your trip.
Trailer Wiring Harness
The trailer wiring is a four-wire harness assembly. The
wires are blunted and taped to the wiring harness.
The harness and wiring are stored under the vehicle on
the driver’s side. The harness has no connector and
should be wired by a qualified electrical technician. The
technician can use the following color code chart
when connecting the wiring harness to your trailer.
•
•
•
•
Black: Ground wire.
Yellow: Left turn lamps.
Dark Green: Right turn lamps.
Brown: Parking lamps.
Securely attach the harness to the trailer, then tape or
strap it to your vehicle’s frame rail. Be sure you
leave it loose enough so the wiring doesn’t bend or
break, but not so loose that it drags on the ground. Store
the harness in its original place. Wrap the harness
together and tie it neatly so it won’t be damaged.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-51
✍ NOTES
4-52
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-6
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Cover ...............................................5-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-20
Engine Coolant .............................................5-23
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-26
Engine Overheating .......................................5-26
Cooling System ............................................5-28
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-31
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-31
Brakes ........................................................5-33
Battery ........................................................5-36
Jump Starting ...............................................5-37
Rear Axle .......................................................5-43
Headlamp Aiming ...........................................5-43
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-43
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-44
Headlamps ..................................................5-44
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker
and Parking Lamps ....................................5-45
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-47
Taillamps .....................................................5-47
Back-Up Lamps ............................................5-48
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-48
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-49
Tires ..............................................................5-51
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-58
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-59
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-60
Buying New Tires .........................................5-60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-61
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-63
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-63
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Chains ..................................................5-65
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-66
Tire Inflator Kit .............................................5-67
Appearance Care ............................................5-74
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-74
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-77
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-77
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-77
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-80
Finish Damage .............................................5-80
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-80
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-80
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-81
5-2
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-82
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-82
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-82
Electrical System ............................................5-83
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-83
Headlamps ..................................................5-83
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-83
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-83
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-84
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-92
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-13.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-55.
5-3
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-17.
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) on page 5-82.
Gasoline Octane
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine.
A little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are
using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
Canada Only
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn
on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-32 ) and
your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs,
return to your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel
used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General
Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that
are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is
behind a hinged door on
the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
While refueling, let the fuel
cap hang by the tether
below the fuel fill opening.
5-7
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring to it; if
you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the
right.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. This
spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and
is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap
slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
5-8
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
of Your Vehicle on page 5-77.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate in to
the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-32.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-32.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle located
inside the vehicle on
the lower left side
of the instrument
panel.
2. Release the secondary latch at the front of
the hood.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas struts
will automatically take over to lift and hold the
hood in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then, pull the hood down to close. You
must drop the hood from about 12 inches (30 cm) or less
to latch the hood properly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the engine, you’ll see:
5-12
A. Remote Positive Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-37 for more information.
B. Coolant Surge Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-23 for more information.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for
more information.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for
more information.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-20 for more
information.
F. Engine Cover. See Engine Cover on page 5-18 for
more information.
G. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19 for more information.
H. Remote Negative Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-37 for more information.
I. Power Steering Reservoir. See Power Steering Fluid
on page 5-31 for more information.
J. Brake Master Cylinder. See Brakes on page 5-33 for
more information.
K. Underhood Fuse Block Cover. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-84 for more information.
L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-31 for more information.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-13
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the hole at the tip of the dipstick,
then you will need to add at least one quart of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section explains
what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-92.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
hole, your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-14
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be 0°F
(−18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not available,
you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-15
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil light will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next two
times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained service
people who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-16
How to Reset the Change Engine Oil Light
What to Do with Used Oil
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
change engine oil light being turned on, reset the
system.
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Always reset the engine oil life system to 100% after
every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset
the change engine oil light, do the following:
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
1. Press the fuel information button until ENGINE
OIL LIFE appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Controls and Displays on
page 3-44 for more information.
2. Press and hold the select button. The engine oil life
percentage will change to 100.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the change engine oil light comes back on when you
start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-17
Engine Cover
Your vehicle has a removable engine cover.
To remove the engine cover do the following:
1. Remove the engine cover insert if your vehicle has
one. See “Engine Cover Insert” following for
instructions.
2. Unscrew the three bolts from the engine and lift off
the cover.
3. To reinstall the engine cover, reverse the steps.
Engine Cover Insert
Your vehicle may have an
engine cover insert.
The engine cover insert must be removed to access the
bolts that secure the engine cover to the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to remove the engine cover
insert:
1. Using a flat-bladed tool, lift up on the front outboard
edges of the engine cover insert to release the clips.
2. Slide the engine cover insert rearward to release the
insert from the two hooks located at the rear
outboard edges of the insert.
3. Lift off the engine cover insert.
4. To reinstall the insert, reverse the steps.
5-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located at the center front
of the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for location of the engine
air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at each oil change and
replace it at the first oil change after 25,000 miles
(41 500 km). See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
5-19
To inspect or replace the filter, do the following:
1. Remove the two bolts on the engine air cleaner/filter
and lift off the cover.
2. Twist out the old engine air cleaner/filter and
replace it, if necessary.
3. Reinstall the cover.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/ filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change the
Automatic Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter at the first oil change
after 25,000 miles (41 500 km) if the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher
• In hilly or mountainous terrain
• When doing frequent trailer towing
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at the first oil
change after 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
How to Check the Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be difficult, you may choose
to have this done at the dealership service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C)
At high speed for quite a while
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather
While pulling a trailer
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C). If your vehicle has the auxiliary gage
package, you can check the transmission fluid
temperature. See Auxiliary Gage Package on page 3-41
for more information.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50°F (10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the
vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
5-21
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle may have this
symbol on it or say
TRANS/LOCK.
The transmission dipstick is located on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle in the rear of the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
5-22
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.)
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON®-III is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check” earlier.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first,
if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to
your radiator, see Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-23
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-24
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant surge tank is located on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle at the rear of the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture to the coolant surge tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
{CAUTION:
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL
COLD mark or a little higher.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
5-25
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-32.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-26
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have
the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-39.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Stop after high-speed driving.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-27
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Engine Cooling Fan
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
5-28
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the surge cap or in the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
5-29
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50
mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-30
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant surge tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL mark. If necessary, add
only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
The power steering fluid reservoir is located in the front
of the engine compartment on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. The cap to the reservoir has this symbol on it.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-31
Adding Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full.
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-32
Brakes
Brake Fluid
you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is,
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-33
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it
is not, have your brake
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-13.
5-34
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind
of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Appearance Care on page 5-74.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving (except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
5-35
Brake Pedal Travel
Battery
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery, get
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
battery. The battery is located under the rear of the
vehicle.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance you have come to
expect can change in many other ways if someone puts
in the wrong replacement brake parts.
5-36
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
If your battery has run down, you may want use another
vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle.
Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if
you are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-37 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-85.
5-37
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put your transmission
in PARK (P) before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
5-38
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations on the other
vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. You should always use these
remote terminals instead of the terminals on the
battery.
The remote positive (+)
terminal is located in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle.
Press inward on the tabs located on the outboard
sides of the remote positive (+) terminal cover
and pull outward to access the terminal.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located near the
power steering fluid reservoir. It is marked
“GND (−).” See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more information on location.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located on the rear underside of
the vehicle. You will not need to access the battery
for jump starting. The remote positive (+) terminal
is for that purpose.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the ACDelco® battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-39
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could also be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to the negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect the
negative (−) cable to negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-40
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
remote positive (+)
terminal location on the
vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal location of the
vehicle with the
good battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
8. Now connect the
negative (−) cable to
the negative (−)
terminal location of the
vehicle with the
good battery. Use a
remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Don’t let the other end of the cable touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the
negative (−) cable does not go to the dead battery.
It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part
or to a remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle
with the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable to the remote
negative (−) terminal,
marked GND (−),
on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery. If it
won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
5-41
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
5-42
Rear Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch (0 to 10 mm)
below the bottom of the filler plug hole.
It is not necessary to regularly check the rear axle
fluid unless there is a leak in the system or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss in the system indicates
that you have a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13
for the type of fluid to use.
Headlamp Aiming
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp
aim may be affected. If you believe your headlamps
need to be re-aimed, we recommend that you take your
vehicle to the dealer for service. However, it is
possible for you to re-aim your headlamps by following
the procedure in the service manual for your vehicle.
Bulb Replacement
See Replacement Bulbs on page 5-48 for the proper
types of bulbs to use. For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact your dealer’s service
department.
5-43
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
To replace the headlamp bulbs do the following:
1. Turn the front wheels as far as they will go in the
opposite direction of the bulb that is being changed.
2. Reach underneath the vehicle and locate the
headlamp door. Use a tool to remove the fastener
retaining the door.
5-44
3. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove it from
the assembly.
There are separate sockets for the high and
low-beam headlamps.
4. Pull the socket out of the headlamp assembly.
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
Front Turn and Parking Lamps
To change the front turn or parking lamps do the
following:
1. Locate the bar that runs across the front of the
vehicle and remove the two screws located near
the front of the hood that hold the bar in place.
2. Release the tabs that attach the bar to the
headlamps.
5. Separate the bulb assembly from the wiring
harness and replace the unit.
6. Put the socket back into the headlamp assembly in
the vehicle by turning it clockwise.
7. Reinstall the headlamp cover and tighten the
fastener.
3. Pull outward on the bar to remove it from the vehicle.
5-45
Sidemarker Lamps
To replace the bulbs in the sidemarker lamps do the
following:
1. Reach underneath the vehicle to locate and release
the clips holding the lamp assembly in place.
2. Push the assembly forward.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise until you
hear a click.
4. Locate and release the tabs behind the grille that
hold the lamp assembly in place. Unsnap the tabs
and push forward to remove the lamp assembly.
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to access
the bulb.
6. Pull the old bulb out of the socket and push in a
new bulb.
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the old bulb out of the socket and push in a
new bulb.
5. Reverse steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.
5-46
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
It is recommended that this component be replaced as
a unit. See your dealer.
Taillamps
To change the taillamp bulbs, do the following:
1. Reach underneath the rear of the vehicle.
3. Pull the old bulb out of the socket and push in a
new bulb.
4. Reinstall the socket into the lamp assembly and
turn it clockwise to secure.
2. Find the bulb socket, twist counterclockwise, and
remove it from the lamp assembly.
5-47
Back-Up Lamps
To replace the bulb in the back-up lamps, do the
following:
1. Reach underneath the vehicle near the license
plate and find the bulb socket.
3. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and then pull
outward to remove it from the socket.
4. Insert a new bulb into the socket and turn it
clockwise to secure it.
5. Reverse the previous steps to reinstall the lamp
assembly on the vehicle.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-Up Lamps
2057
High Beam Headlamp
9005HB3
Low Beam Headlamp
H11
Parking Lamps
T20
Sidemarker Lamps
194
Taillamps
3157
Turn Signal Lamps
T20
*For all other bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer.
2. To remove the socket from the lamp assembly,
locate and squeeze the release tab while turning
the socket counterclockwise.
5-48
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected
periodically for wear and cracking. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-15.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch
the windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage
that occurs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
5-49
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked
by bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the
notched end, pull the insert from the blade
assembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
5-50
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.
Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the
hook slot.
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-32.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
5-51
Winter Tires
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut,
punctured or broken by a sudden impact,
such as when you hit a pothole. Keep tires
at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58 for
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
5-52
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction
you would like or the same level of performance as
winter tires on snow or ice covered roads. If you choose
to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size as your
original equipment tires.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-60.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustration is an example of a
typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the Tire Size illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) Department of Transportation (DOT): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
5-53
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information, see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-61.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows, an example of, a typical
passenger car tire size.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter “P” as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
5-54
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C, of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
“R” means radial ply construction; the letter “D” means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
5-55
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at
the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kilopascals (kPa) to one psi.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by
150 pounds (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-32.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
5-56
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-58 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire
information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-61.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg)
plus the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-32.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. See When
It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-60.
5-57
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-32, for examples of these labels and
where they are located on your vehicle. If you’ll be
driving at high speeds (speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h)
or higher), where it is legal, set the cold inflation
pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on
the tire sidewall, or to 35 psi (244 kPa), whichever
is lower. See the example below. When you end this
high-speed driving, return to the cold inflation pressure
shown on the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and
Loading Information Label.
Example:
You’ll find maximum load and inflation pressure molded
on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters near the rim
flange. It will read something like this: Maximum load
690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
5-58
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure
for high-speed driving at 35 psi (244 kPa) for the
front and rear tires.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check
the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Certification/Tire
label or the Tire and Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure
is low, add air until you reach the recommended
amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
The tires on your vehicle are different sizes front to rear.
Due to this, your tires should not be rotated. Each tire
and wheel should be used only in the position it is in.
Check your tires and wheels regularly for unusual wear
and damage. Also see, Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4, When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-60
and Wheel Replacement on page 5-63.
5-59
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires may
not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
5-60
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle
needs, look at the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32, for examples of these labels and
where they are located on your vehicle.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC
Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, load range, speed rating, traction, ride, tire
pressure monitoring system performance and other
things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires
have an all-season tread design, the TPC number will be
followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
(other than those originally installed on your
vehicle) or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes (other than those originally installed on
your vehicle) may also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size and
type tires on all four wheels.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
5-61
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
5-62
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire clearance to the
body and chassis.
5-63
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you change
a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper
or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the
rust or dirt off.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off. This could lead to a
crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get new
GM original equipment wheel nuts.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel
nuts might come loose and the wheel could
fall off, causing a crash.
5-64
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Don’t use tire chains. There’s not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a
crash. Use another type of traction device only
if its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels. If you do find traction devices
that will fit, install them on the rear tires.
5-65
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has no spare tire, no tire changing
equipment and no place to store a tire.
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See
Tires on page 5-51. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much
more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should
ever have a “blow out” here are a few tips about what to
expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you’d
use in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-66
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by
driving slowly to a level place and stopping. Then do this:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel or has
damaged sidewalls or large tears that allow rapid
air loss, call a tire repair facility. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nail or
other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit may
be used to repair the damaged tire temporarily. The kit
uses a liquid tire sealant to seal small punctures in
the tread area of the tire. The flat tire is then inflated to
at least 26 psi (179 kPa) and driven to evenly distribute
the tire sealant. The tire pressure is checked after
driving for a maximum of 10 minutes to see if the
slow leak has been stopped. If the tire pressure is
19 psi (131 kPa) or more, inflate the tire up to the
standard operating pressure as shown on the tire and
loading information label found on center pillar near the
door latch or on the rear edge of the driver’s door.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-58.
You should have the damaged tire repaired as soon as
possible. The tire sealant is a temporary repair only.
For more information regarding the tire inflator kit
see Tire Inflator Kit on page 5-66.
The repair kit contains the following:
Notice: If the tire pressure has dropped below
19 psi (131 kPa), the vehicle should not be driven.
Damage to the tire may be severe and the sealant
will not be effective. Contact Roadside Assistance,
see Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Tire Inflator Kit
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire inflator kit. It is
located behind the driver’s seat of your vehicle. Use the
following directions for use of your tire inflator kit
instead of directions you may find on or near the kit.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Air Compressor
Tire Sealant
Sealant Filling Hose
Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
E. Air Compressor
Inflator Hose
F. Air Pressure Gage
G. Sealant Filling
Hose Plug
H. Valve Core Remover
I. Spare Valve Core
J. 55 mph (90 km/h) Label
5-67
Accessing the Tire Inflator Kit
Tire Sealant
To access the tire inflator kit for use, do the following:
The kit contains a liquid sealant that when injected into
a flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holes or cuts
in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealant cannot
repair tire damage caused while driving on a flat tire or
a tire that has had a “blow out” or a tire that has
punctures in the sidewall areas. The tire sealant solution
is a one-time use application for one tire only. Check
the tire sealant expiration date; the sealant may not be
as effective beyond the expiration date. The tire
sealant can be peeled off easily after drying.
1. Loosen the two nuts holding the tire inflator kit cover
in place.
Using Tire Sealant
Before using the tire sealant, be sure the valve stem
area is clean and free of debris, such as mud, snow, ice,
brake dust, etc. The valve stem should be located at
the bottom of the tire before applying the tire sealant.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Grasp the handle and pull the tire inflator kit out.
4. Open the tire inflator kit case by lifting up the
two tabs located on either side of the kit handle.
5-68
To apply the tire sealant, do the following:
Air Compressor
1. Turn the valve cap on the tire valve
counterclockwise to remove it.
2. Remove the valve core using the valve core tool
provided in the tire inflator kit. An extra valve core
is also provided in the kit.
3. Shake the bottle to make sure the sealant is well
mixed.
4. Attach the tire sealant filling hose to the bottle of
tire sealant to pierce the seal on the bottle.
5. Remove the sealing plug from the end of the filling
hose and insert the end of the hose over the tire
valve.
6. Hold the bottle upside down over the tire valve and
squeeze the sealant into the tire until the bottle is
empty.
7. Remove the sealant filling hose from the tire valve
and reinstall the sealing plug.
A. Inflating Hose
B. Air Pressure Gage
C. ON/OFF Switch
D. Air Compressor Plug
8. Insert the valve core back into the tire valve. Turn
valve core tool clockwise to secure the valve core.
Once the tire sealant is applied, you can use the
compressor to inflate the tire.
5-69
The air compressor included in the tire inflator kit was
designed exclusively for your vehicle. After the
sealant has been injected into the flat tire, use the air
compressor to inflate the flat tire. Follow these
instructions:
1. Put the transmission in PARK (P) and apply the
parking brake. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-19 and Parking Brake on page 2-18.
5-70
2. Attach the nozzle on the compressor to the valve
stem of the flat tire, and then insert the plug into
an accessory power outlet on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index.
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate the tire to its recommended pressure.
Do not exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
Notice: The car engine must be running to avoid
draining the battery while running the air
compressor.
3. Start your vehicle.
5. Inflate the tire to at
least 26 psi (179 kPa),
but not more than
36 psi (248 kPa).
4. Turn the compressor on to inflate the tire.
5-71
Notice: If the air compressor runs for more than
six minutes, at a time, it may overheat. The
excessive heat could damage the compressor.
Always operate the compressor for six minutes or
less when inflating a tire.
6. Inflate the tire for
up to a maximum
of six minutes.
Notice: If 26 psi (179 kPa) tire pressure cannot be
reached after six minutes the vehicle should not
be driven further. Damage to the tire is severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Remove the air
compressor plug from the accessory power outlet
and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire
valve. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.
5-72
7. If 26 psi (179 kPa) tire pressure is reached in
six minutes or less, disconnect the air compressor.
8. Attach the enclosed
maximum speed label
to the inside upper
left corner of the
windshield or to the
face of the radio/clock.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h)
until you have the damaged tire inspected
and repaired.
9. Drive the vehicle immediately to distribute the tire
sealant evenly inside the tire.
10. After driving for 10 minutes, recheck the tire
pressure. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (131 kPa) or
more, inflate the tire to the standard operating
pressure as shown on the Certification/Tire label
located on the edge of the driver’s door.
If the tire pressure has dropped below
19 psi (131 kPa), do not continue to drive the
vehicle. The tire is severely damaged and the tire
sealant will not be effective. Repair or replace
the tire as soon as possible.
Tire Inflator Kit Storage
The tire inflator kit is stored behind the driver’s seat in
your vehicle. To reinstall the kit after use, do the
following:
{CAUTION:
Storing the tire inflator kit or other equipment in
the passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
the tire inflator kit in the proper place.
1. Place the air compressor pump and accessories
into the inflator kit case.
2. Move the driver’s seat forward and tilt the seatback
forward out of the way.
3. Place the cover over the tire inflator kit.
4. Hold the kit with the cover on against the back wall
of the passenger compartment in the designated
storage area as you perform the next step.
5. Reinstall the two nuts holding the tire inflator kit
cover in place.
5-73
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you are cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Benzene
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Naphtha
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Carbon Tetrachloride
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
on page 5-81.
Gasoline
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
5-74
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can — before
they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge
the soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking sold to 1 cup (250 ml) of
lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry
completely.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
5-75
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
5-76
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-81.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-81.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
5-77
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that does not have enough
clearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, you
could damage your vehicle. Verify with the manager
of the car wash that your vehicle will fit before
entering the car wash or use a touchless car wash.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-81.
5-78
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Cleaning the Windshield and Wiper
Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels
Your vehicle will have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-79
Cleaning Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
5-80
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines and
Foaming Tire Shine Low
protects in one easy step,
Gloss
no wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13.
5-81
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label is:
•
•
•
•
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
5-82
your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-55.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Headlamps
The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit
breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go
on and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this
happens, have your headlamp wiring checked right away.
5-83
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Center Console Fuse Block
The center console fuse
block is located on the
center console between
the two seats.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
To remove the fuse block cover and access the fuses,
do the following:
1. Move the passenger’s seat all the way forward and
tilt the seatback forward. See Power Seats on
page 1-2 and Seatback Latches on page 1-6 for
more information.
2. Pull the handle on the fuse block cover toward you
and then slide it to the side. You will then be able
to remove the cover completely.
3. To reinstall the cover, slide it to the side until it is
lined up with the access hole. Then, push on the
fuse panel cover until it latches into place.
5-84
Fuses
03
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
27
Usage
Rear Window Defogger
Truck Body Controller
Rear Window Defogger
Driver Seat Module
Truck Body Controller
Blank
Driver’s Door Module, Power Mirrors
Amplifier
Blank
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Driver’s Side Rear Parking Lamp
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Passenger’s Side Rear Parking Lamp
Blank
Blank
Locks
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
HomeLink® System
5-85
Fuses
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
47
48
5-86
Usage
Roof Door Module
Blank
Truck Body Controller
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Windshield Wipers
Stoplamps
Blank
Climate Control System, Driver’s
Door Unlock
Front Parking Lamps
Driver’s Side Turn Signal
Climate Control System
Truck Body Controller
Radio
Trailer Parking Lamps
Passenger’s Side Turn Signal
Blank
Accessory Power Outlets
Ignition
Blank
Fuses
49
50
51
52
Usage
Blank
Truck Body Controller, Ignition
Brakes
Blank
Relays
18
24
30
Usage
Locks
Unlock
Parking Lamps
Rear Window Defogger, Outside
Power Heated Mirrors
45
Circuit
Breakers
01
02
08
Usage
Roof & Door Module
Roof Pump
Power Seats
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The fuse block is located
under the hood in the
engine compartment on
the driver’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for more
information on location.
To remove the fuse block cover and access the fuses,
do the following:
1. To remove the primary fuse block cover, press in
on the two locking tabs and then lift the cover off.
Fuses
1
3
Usage
Air Conditioning
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
Canister, Fuel System
4
Ignition
2. Lift up on the secondary cover to remove it.
3. Reverse the steps to reinstall the covers.
2
5-87
Fuses
5
6
7
Starter
Ignition
Driver’s Side High Beam Headlamp
Fuses
21
22
23
Usage
Fog Lamps
Horn
Injector A
9
Passenger’s Side High Beam
Headlamp
Ignition
24
25
26
Injector B
Oxygen Sensor A
Oxygen Sensor B
10
Instrument Panel Cluster, Driver
Information Center (DIC)
27
Windshield Washer
12
Driver’s Side Low Beam Headlamp
Passenger’s Side Low Beam
Headlamp
28
29
30
Cigarette Lighter
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Blank
13
14
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Air Bag System
31
32
Cargo Cover Release
Hazard Warning Flashers
15
16
17
Truck Body Controller
Truck Body Control, Ignition
Driver’s Side Stoplamp/Turn Signals
33
44
45
Stoplamps
Engine Cooling Fan
Climate Control Fan
18
Passenger’s Side Stoplamp/Turn
Signals
46
47
Ignition A
Ignition B
19
20
Back-up Lamps
Throttle Actuator Control (TAC)
48
49
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Body Fuse
8
11
5-88
Usage
Relays
Usage
34
Air Conditioning
35
Fuel Pump
36
Fog Lamps
37
High Beam Headlamps
38
Cargo Cover Release
39
Horn
40
Windshield Washer
41
Headlamp Driver Module
42
Ignition
43
Starter
Relay Center
There is a relay center located in the area where the
convertible top is stored when it is open. To access the
relay center, do the following:
1. Open the convertible top until the roof tonneau and
the boot cover panel are upright so that you can
reach into the convertible top storage area as
shown. See “Convertible Top Operation” under
Convertible Top on page 2-45 for more information.
5-89
2. Locate the water-tight box that houses the relay
center and remove the four nuts that secure the
cover to the backside of the passenger
compartment.
4. Locate the relay center inside the box. It is located
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Press in the tabs on the sides of the cover and lift
to remove the cover.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the relay center cover
and close the water-tight box.
5-90
5. Press in the tabs at each end of the relay center
cover and lift to remove.
Following is a list of relays
contained in the relay
center.
Relays
e
Usage
Driver’s Door Lock
RT DRL
Passenger’s Side Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
LT DRL
Driver’s Side Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
=
Rear Window Defogger
5-91
Capacities and Specifications
Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information. All capacities are approximate.
When adding fluids, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck the fluid level
after filling.
Capacities and Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
5.3L V8
T
M30
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Air conditioning Refrigerant R-134a
Cooling System
Differential Fluid
2.8 lbs
15.3 quarts
4.0 quarts
1.27 kg
14.5 L
6.6 L
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
6.0 quarts
25.0 gallons
5.7 L
94.6 L
2.4 quarts
2.3 L
5.0 quarts
4.7 L
100 ft lb
140 Y
Rear Axle
Transmission
(Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
5-92
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-8
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................6-10
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-16
Maintenance Record .....................................6-17
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-8 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-32.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-13.
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your GM
Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained service technicians
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts
and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil on page 5-13 for information on the Engine
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL light appears, certain
services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL light comes on within ten months since
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on ten months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-19. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †.
•
•
Check tire inflation pressures and tire wear. See Tires on page 5-51.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace fuel filter. An Emission
Control Service. See footnote †.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 5-19. An Emission Control
Service.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
6-6
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (normal service).
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
•
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
•
Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
•
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
•
Engine cooling system service
(or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
•
6-7
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once
a year.
6-8
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air
bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, all body door and
fuel door hinges, latches and locks, including glove box
and console doors, hood assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl and any moving seat
hardware. Lubricate the hood safety lever pivot and
prop rod pivot. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better and not stick
or squeak.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23 for further details.
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires for wear and make sure tires
are inflated to the correct pressures. See Tires on
page 5-51 for further details.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-18 if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-10
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to OFF in each shift lever position.
• The key should turn to OFF only when the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-18 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but do not start the engine. Without
applying the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact your
GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-11
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
6-12
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench
Engine Oil
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
only
Engine Coolant water and use
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-23.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent
Chassis Lubricant
Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Parking Brake (GM
88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides Canada
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
System
Canada 89021186).
Automatic
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
6-13
Usage
Chassis
Lubrication
Rear Axle
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
6-14
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261, in
Canada 10953455) meeting GM
Specification 9986115.
Usage
Hood and Door
Hinges, Fuel
Filler Door and
Folding Seats
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points,
Hinges, Latch
Bolt and
Linkage
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.
12371287, in Canada 10953437).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
Automatic Transmission Filter Kit
Engine Air Cleaner
Engine Oil Filter
Fuel Filter
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blade
GM® Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
24200796
—
15036141
A2014C
25010633
PF44
88983068
GF831
12571164
41–985
20.0 inches (50.8 cm)
6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6-16
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-19
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-20
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities ...........................................7-6
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-8
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders .........................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-12
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-13
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the
top left of the instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.)
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-4
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States – Customer Assistance
Overseas – Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices
(TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA® (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) –
Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
Canada – Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices
(TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
7-5
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward eligible
aftermarket driver or
passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. All TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Roadside Assistance Program
Security While You Travel
1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
As the proud owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Chevrolet’s Roadside
Assistance toll-free number is staffed by courteous
and capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel ($5
maximum) for the customer to get to the nearest
service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.)
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
7-7
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Plan Ahead When Possible
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
repairs.
7-8
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one
way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
you obtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of
$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five day maximum) may be available for
the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through
a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
7-9
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact you dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-10
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components to
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bag
deployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock
braking and to help the driver control the vehicle
in difficult driving situations. Some information may be
stored during regular operations to facilitate repair
of detected malfunctions; other information is stored only
in a crash or near crash event by computer systems
commonly called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such
as engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,
vehicle speed, safety belt usage, air bag readiness, air
bag performance data, and the severity of a collision.
This information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
7-11
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Service Manuals
Owner’s Information
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
7-13
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
7-14
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
A
Accessing the Tire Inflator Kit ........................... 5-68
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-17
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-32
Additional Program Information ......................... 7-10
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-83
Add-On Equipment .......................................... 4-38
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ...... 3-64, 3-74
Air Bag
Off Light ..................................................... 3-28
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-26
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-42
Air Bag Off Switch ....................................... 1-51
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-48
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-55
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-48
What Will You See After an Air Bag Inflates? ...... 1-49
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-47
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-45
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-19
Air Compressor .............................................. 5-69
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) .... 7-10
AM ............................................................... 3-87
Antenna, Integrated Windshield ......................... 3-87
Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-31
Appearance Care ............................................
Care of Safety Belts ....................................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............
Finish Damage ............................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Integrated Windshield Antenna .......................
Radio with CD ............................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Setting the Time ..........................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
Auxiliary Gage Package ...................................
5-74
5-77
5-80
5-74
5-77
5-80
5-80
5-80
5-81
5-77
3-18
3-61
3-86
3-87
3-87
3-87
3-62
3-71
3-61
3-85
3-87
3-13
5-20
2-16
3-41
1
B
Backing Up .................................................... 4-49
Back-Up Lamps .............................................. 5-48
Battery .......................................................... 5-36
Battery Not Charging ....................................... 3-48
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-5
Battery Rundown Protection ............................. 3-16
Battery Voltage Too High ................................. 3-49
Battery Voltage Too Low .................................. 3-49
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-23
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-18
System Warning Light .................................. 3-30
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 5-36
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-33
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-35
Brakes .......................................................... 5-33
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-13
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-43
Back-Up Lamps ........................................... 5-48
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-47
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-45
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-44
Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 5-43
2
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Headlamps .................................................
Replacement Bulbs ......................................
Taillamps ....................................................
Buying New Tires ...........................................
5-44
5-48
5-47
5-60
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canada – Customer Assistance .......................... 7-5
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-8
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-92
Carbon Monoxide ..................... 2-8, 2-21, 4-26, 4-39
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-77
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-87
Your CDs ................................................... 3-87
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-31
Cargo Cover Ajar ............................................ 3-49
Cargo Net System .......................................... 2-36
Cargo Tie Downs ............................................ 2-34
CD Messages ........................................ 3-70, 3-85
Center Console Fuse Block .............................. 5-84
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-30
Center Console Switchbank .............................. 3-17
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...........
Certification/Tire Label .....................................
Chains, Tires ..................................................
Change Trans (Transmission) Fluid ....................
Charging System Light ....................................
Check
Engine Light ...............................................
Gages Warning Light ...................................
Check Engine Light .........................................
Check Oil Level ..............................................
Checking Brake Fluid ......................................
Checking Coolant ............................................
Checking Engine Oil ........................................
Checking the Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level .................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood ......................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...................................
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ...............................
Infants and Young Children ...........................
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ..........................
Older Children .............................................
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................
5-47
4-36
5-65
3-49
3-29
3-32
3-39
3-32
3-49
5-34
5-25
5-13
5-21
5-10
5-80
1-27
1-24
1-32
1-21
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Passenger Seat Position ...........................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle ..................................
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels .....
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .......................
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet ....................................
Cleaning Glass Surfaces ..................................
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components .................
Cleaning Leather ............................................
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ...........
Cleaning the Windshield and Wiper Blades .........
Cleaning Tires ................................................
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................
Climate Control System ...................................
Outlet Adjustment ........................................
Content Theft-Deferrent ....................................
1-37
1-30
1-32
3-18
5-74
5-77
5-80
5-77
5-79
5-78
5-74
5-76
5-76
5-76
5-76
5-79
5-80
5-76
3-19
3-22
2-11
1-34
3
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Convertible Top .............................................. 2-45
Convertible Top Operation ................................ 2-46
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-32
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-26
Cooling System .............................................. 5-28
Cruise Control .................................................. 3-8
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-38
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-30
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-14
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-8
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-6
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .... 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-12
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-12
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-13
Customizing Your Automatic Door Locks Feature ... 2-8
4
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-21
Depress Brake ............................................... 3-49
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Door
Locks .......................................................... 2-6
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-7
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-12
Driver Door Ajar ............................................. 3-50
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-44
DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-44
DIC Vehicle Personalization .......................... 3-55
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-48
Driver’s Seat .................................................... 1-2
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-16
City ........................................................... 4-20
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17
Winter ........................................................ 4-26
Driving On Grades ..........................................
Driving on Snow or Ice ....................................
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ...............
Driving Through Flowing Water .........................
Driving with a Trailer .......................................
Brake Pedal Travel .........................................
4-50
4-27
4-19
4-19
4-48
5-35
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ......................................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...........................
Headlamps .................................................
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................
Emergency Cargo Cover Release Handle ...........
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs .................................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter .........................................
Battery .......................................................
Change Engine Oil Light ...............................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............
Coolant ......................................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ...........................
Cover ........................................................
Drive Belt Routing .......................................
5-83
5-84
5-83
5-83
5-83
2-34
3-35
5-19
5-36
3-37
3-32
5-23
3-32
5-18
6-16
Engine (cont.)
Engine Compartment Overview ......................
Exhaust .....................................................
Oil .............................................................
Overheating ................................................
Reduced Power Light ...................................
Starting ......................................................
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ......................
Engine Coolant Hot Idle Engine ........................
Engine Cover Insert ........................................
Engine Oil Additives ........................................
Engine Overheated Stop Engine .......................
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons ..............................
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................
Exit Lighting ...................................................
Express Down Window ....................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
Exterior Lamps ...............................................
5-12
2-21
5-13
5-26
3-38
2-15
5-87
3-50
5-18
5-16
3-50
2-29
7-10
3-16
2-10
1-20
3-12
F
Fan Knob ......................................................
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ......................................
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station ....... 3-65,
Finding a Station .................................... 3-63,
3-20
5-19
3-75
3-72
5
Finish Care .................................................... 5-78
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-80
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-7
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-66
Flip Hall Switch Fault ...................................... 3-50
Floor Tracks ................................................... 2-35
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-20
Power Steering ........................................... 5-31
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-31
FM ............................................................... 3-87
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-14
Following Distance .......................................... 4-48
Front Map Lamps ........................................... 3-16
Front Turn and Parking Lamps ......................... 5-45
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-40
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Fuel Information .............................................. 3-46
6
Fuel Level Low ............................................... 3-51
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-84
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-83
G
Gage
Check Gages Warning Light .......................... 3-39
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-32
Fuel .......................................................... 3-40
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-36
Speedometer .............................................. 3-25
Tachometer ................................................. 3-25
Gage, Auxiliary Package .................................. 3-41
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-26
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-29
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-30
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-6
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-3
Hdr (Header) Latch Switch Fault ....................... 3-51
Headlamp
Aiming ....................................................... 5-43
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-6
Headlamps .................................................... 5-44
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-43
Electrical System ......................................... 5-83
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker
and Parking Lamps .................................. 5-45
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-44
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-39
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-24
Hitches .......................................................... 4-43
HomeLink® Transmitter .................................... 2-26
HomeLink® Transmitter, Programming ................ 2-27
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-4
How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid .......... 5-23
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank ...... 5-30
How to Check ................................................ 5-59
How to Check Lubricant ................................... 5-43
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-31
How to Check the Automatic Transmission Fluid ..... 5-21
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 5-19
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-12
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-19
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-27
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-26
If the Light is Flashing ..................................... 3-34
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-34
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-29
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-31
If You Decide To Pull A Trailer .......................... 4-40
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-14
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-24
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-58
Inflator Kit, Tire ............................................... 5-67
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-24
Overview ..................................................... 3-2
Storage Area .............................................. 2-30
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-15
Integrated Windshield Antenna .......................... 3-87
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-15
7
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-37
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Lamps
Exterior ...................................................... 3-12
Interior ....................................................... 3-15
Lamps On Reminder ....................................... 3-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-12
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-32
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-34
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-6
Leaving Your Vehicle ......................................... 2-8
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running ... 2-20
8
Light
Air Bag Off ................................................. 3-28
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-26
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-31
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-30
Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-37
Charging System ......................................... 3-29
Check Gages Warning ................................. 3-39
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-38
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-39
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-32
Reduced Engine Power ................................ 3-38
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-26
Security ..................................................... 3-37
TCS Warning Light ...................................... 3-31
Traction Control System (TCS) Warning .......... 3-31
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors .............................. 2-11
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-32
Locks
Door ........................................................... 2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle ..................................... 2-8
Power Door .................................................. 2-7
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-8
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-17
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-15
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-51
Making Turns ................................................. 4-49
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-32
Manually Open Tonneau .................................. 3-51
Map Pocket ................................................... 2-30
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-5
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-52
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-48
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands) – Customer Assistance ....... 7-5
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with HomeLink® ... 2-23
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-23
Outside Automatic Dimming Heated Mirror ...... 2-25
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-25
Outside Power Heated Mirrors ....................... 2-24
Mode Knob .................................................... 3-20
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-4
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-15
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-25
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-25
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13
9
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-37
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-36
Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine .......................... 3-51
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-21
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-4
Opening the Cargo Cover ................................ 2-31
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-4
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-22
Outside
Automatic Dimming Heated Mirror .................. 2-25
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-25
Power Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-24
Overseas – Customer Assistance ........................ 7-5
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-13
P
Parade Dimming .............................................
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................
Shifting Out of ............................................
Parking
Brake ........................................................
Over Things That Burn .................................
10
3-16
2-19
2-20
2-18
2-21
Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-50
Passenger Door Ajar ....................................... 3-52
Passenger Position, Safety Belts ....................... 1-20
Passenger’s Seat ............................................. 1-3
Passing ................................................. 4-13, 4-49
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-13
Payload ......................................................... 4-38
Perimeter Lighting ........................................... 3-16
Personalization ............................................... 3-48
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-8
Playing a CD ......................................... 3-68, 3-78
Playing a Specific Loaded CD .......................... 3-80
Playing the Radio ................................... 3-62, 3-71
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-17
Door Locks .................................................. 2-7
Electrical System ......................................... 5-83
Reduced Engine Light .................................. 3-38
Seat ............................................................ 1-2
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-31
Windows .................................................... 2-10
Power Steering ............................................... 4-11
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-8
Programming the HomeLink® Transmitter ........... 2-27
Programming the Power Windows ..................... 2-10
Put Vehicle in Park ......................................... 3-52
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-11
R
Radio Data System (RDS) ....................... 3-65, 3-75
Radio Messages ............................................. 3-68
Radios .......................................................... 3-61
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-87
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-87
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-62
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-71
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-61
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-85
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-87
RDS Messages ...................................... 3-67, 3-77
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-43
Rear Window Defogger .................................... 3-22
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
HomeLink® ................................................. 2-23
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-23
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-32
Reduce Speed ............................................... 3-52
Reduced Engine Power Light ............................ 3-38
Relay Center .................................................. 5-89
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Cargo Cover .............................. 2-32
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-48
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-36
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-12
General Motors ........................................... 7-12
United States Government ............................ 7-12
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® Button ....... 2-29
Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-30
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-55
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-56
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-55
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-56
Rfa X Battery Low .......................................... 3-52
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-31
Roof Ajar ....................................................... 3-52
Roof Cycle Timeout ......................................... 3-53
Roof Hall Switch Fault ..................................... 3-53
Roof Tonneau ................................................. 2-45
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-16
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-22
11
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................ 3-26
Safety Belts
Care of ...................................................... 5-77
Driver Position ............................................ 1-12
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-12
Passenger Position ...................................... 1-20
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-11
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-20
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-19
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-6
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-47
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-6
Seats
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-52
Power Seats ................................................. 1-2
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-6
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-34
Passenger Seat Position ............................... 1-37
12
Security Light ................................................. 3-37
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6
Select ........................................................... 3-48
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-32
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-13
Service Air Bag .............................................. 3-53
Service Brake System ..................................... 3-53
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-13
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-13
Setting Preset PTYs ................................ 3-66, 3-77
Setting Preset Stations ............................ 3-63, 3-73
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-61
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .................. 3-64, 3-73
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-80
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-19
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-20
Sidemarker Lamps .......................................... 5-46
Side-Saddle Storage ....................................... 2-41
Skidding ........................................................ 4-15
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-20
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-75
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-92
Speedometer .................................................. 3-25
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-15
Steering ........................................................ 4-11
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-12
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-11
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-86
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-5
Stop Vehicle .................................................. 3-54
Storage
Side-Saddle ................................................ 2-41
Storage Areas
Cargo Net System ....................................... 2-36
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-30
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-30
Glove Box .................................................. 2-30
Instrument Panel Storage Area ...................... 2-30
Map Pocket ................................................ 2-30
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-31
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-11
Switchbanks
Center Console ........................................... 3-17
T
Taillamps ....................................................... 5-47
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-31
Temperature Knob ........................................... 3-19
Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-12
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-85
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-11
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-11
Passlock® ................................................... 2-13
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5
Tire Inflator Kit Storage .................................... 5-73
Tire Sealant ................................................... 5-68
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-52
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-54
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-55
Tires ............................................................. 5-51
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-60
Chains ....................................................... 5-65
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-66
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-58
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-59
Tire Inflator Kit ............................................ 5-67
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-61
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-63
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-63
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-60
Tachometer .................................................... 3-25
Tailgate ........................................................... 2-8
13
Tlat (Tonneau Latch) Hall Switch Fault ............... 3-54
Tonn (Tonneau) Hall Switch Fault ...................... 3-54
Tonn (Tonneau) Latd (Latched) Switch Fault ....... 3-54
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-30
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-32
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-20
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-43
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-32
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-39
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-32
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
Control System Warning Light ....................... 3-31
Traction Active ................................................ 3-54
Trailer
Recommendations ....................................... 4-38
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-48
Trailer Wiring Harness ..................................... 4-51
Trans (Transmission) Hot Idle ........................... 3-54
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-20
14
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-16
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-13
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Trip Information .............................................. 3-46
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-25
Turn and Lane Change Signals .......................... 3-6
Turn Signal On ............................................... 3-55
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-5
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-49
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-87
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-61
United States – Customer Assistance .................. 7-5
Unknown Speed ............................................. 3-55
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-75
Using HomeLink® ........................................... 2-29
Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-83
V
W
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-32
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................. 7-10
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-82
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-82
Vehicle Personalization
DIC ........................................................... 3-55
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-52
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-37
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-22
Visors ........................................................... 2-11
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-23
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-48
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-3
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-4
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-77
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-41
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-42
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14
What to Add .................................................. 5-34
What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-17
What to Use .................................. 5-24, 5-31, 5-43
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-63
Replacement ............................................... 5-63
15
When to Add Engine Oil .................................. 5-14
When to Change Engine Oil (GM Oil Life
System) ..................................................... 5-16
When to Check .............................................. 5-59
When to Check and Change Lubricant ............... 5-43
When to Check and Change the Automatic
Transmission Fluid ....................................... 5-20
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................ 5-31
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ..... 5-19
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on
a Hill ......................................................... 4-51
Why Safety Belts Work ..................................... 1-8
Windows ......................................................... 2-9
Power ........................................................ 2-10
Windshield Washer
Fluid .......................................................... 5-31
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-49
Fuses ........................................................ 5-83
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-7
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26
Winter Tires ................................................... 5-52
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
16